You are on page 1of 202

AC 

6/6/2012 
Item No. 4.76 
 
 
 

  UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI
 

  Bachelor of Engineering
 

  First Year Engineering ( Semester I & II), Revised course        
  (REV‐ 2012) from Academic Year 2012 ‐13,                      
  (Common for All Branches of Engineering) 
 

 
(As per Credit Based Semester and Grading System with
 
effect from the academic year 2012–2013)
 

 
 

First Year Engineering ( Semester I & II), Revised course from 
Academic Year 2012 ‐13, (REV‐ 2012),                                                   

Sub Code  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


    Theory  Pract.  Tut. Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 
FEC101  Applied Mathematics‐I  04  ‐  01  04    01  05 
FEC102  Applied Physics‐I  03  01  ‐  03  0.5  ‐  3.5 
FEC103  Applied Chemistry ‐I  03  01  ‐  03  0.5  ‐  3.5 
FEC104  Engineering Mechanics  05  02  ‐  05  01  ‐  06 
FEC105  Basic Electrical &  04  02  ‐  04  01  ‐  05 
Electronics Engineering 
FEC106  Environmental studies  02  ‐  ‐  02  ‐  ‐  02 
FEL101  Basic Workshop Practice‐I  ‐  04  ‐  ‐  02  ‐  02 
    21  10  01  21  05  01  27 
(Common for all branches of Engineering) 

Scheme for FE ‐ Semester ‐ I 
Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   
Code  Theory Marks  Term  Pract.  Oral  Total 
Internal Assessment   End sem.  Work   
Test 1  Test 2  Average  exam    
    of Test 1 
and Test 2 
FEC101  Applied  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  ‐  125 
Mathematics‐I 
FEC102  Applied Physics‐I  15  15  15  60  25  ‐  ‐  100 
FEC103  Applied  15  15  15  60  25  ‐  ‐  100 
Chemistry ‐I 
FEC104  Engineering  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  25  150 
Mechanics 
FEC105  Basic Electrical &  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  25  150 
Electronics 
Engineering 
FEC106  Environmental  15  15  15  60  ‐  ‐  ‐  75 
studies 
FEL101  Basic Workshop  ‐  ‐  ‐  ‐  50  ‐  ‐  50 
Practice‐I 
        105  420  175    50  750 
 
 

First Year Engineering ( Semester I & II), Revised course from 
Academic Year 2012 ‐13, (REV‐ 2012), (Common for all branches) 

Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


Code  Theory Pract.  Tut.  Theory TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 
FEC201  Applied  04  ‐  01  04    01  05 
Mathematics‐II 
FEC202  Applied Physics‐II  03  01  ‐  03  0.5  ‐  3.5 
FEC203  Applied Chemistry ‐II  03  01  ‐  03  0.5    3.5 
FEC204  Engineering Drawing  03  04  ‐  03  02  ‐  05 
FEC205  Structured  04  02  ‐  04  01  ‐  05 
Programming 
Approach  

FEC206  Communication Skills  02  02  ‐  02  01  ‐  03 


FEL201  Basic Workshop  ‐  04  ‐  ‐  02  ‐  02 
Practice ‐II 
    19  14  01  19  07  01  27 
Scheme for Semester ‐ II 
Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   
Code  Theory marks  Term  Pract Oral  Total 
Internal Assessment   End sem.  Work  .   
Test 1  Test 2  Av. of  exam    
    Test 1 & 2 
FEC201  Applied  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  ‐  125 
Mathematics‐II 
FEC202  Applied  15  15  15  60  25  ‐  ‐  100 
 Physics‐II 
FEC203  Applied   15  15  15  60  25  ‐  ‐  100 
Chemistry ‐II 
FEC204  Engineering  15  15  15  60  25  50  ‐  150 
Drawing 
FEC205  Structured  20  20  20  80  25  25  ‐  150 
Programming 
Approach  

FEC206  Communication  10  10  10  40  25  ‐  ‐  75 


Skills 
FEL201  Basic Workshop  ‐  ‐  ‐  ‐  50  ‐  ‐  50 
Practice‐II 
        95  380  200  75    750 
 
Sub  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 
Code 
Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 

FEC101  Applied  04  ‐  01  04    01  05 


Mathematics‐I 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code 
Theory   Term  Prat.  Oral  Total 
Work 
Internal Assessment   End   
sem. 
Test 1  Test 2  Av. of Test 1  exam    
& 2 
   

FEC101  Applied  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  ‐  125 


Mathematics‐I 

   

Detailed Syllabus 

Sr.No  Topics  Hrs 

1  Pre‐requisite:  Review  on  Complex  Number‐Algebra  of  Complex  Number,  2hrs 


Different  representations  of  a  Complex  number  and  other  definitions, 
 
D’Moivre’s Theorem. 
 
Module‐1: Complex Numbers:‐  
2 hrs 
1.1:   Powers and Roots of Exponential and Trigonometric             Functions.  
6 hrs 
1.2:   Circular functions of complex number and Hyperbolic functions.Inverse 
Circular and Inverse Hyperbolic functions. Logarithmic functions.   

1.3:   Separation of real and Imaginary parts of all types of  Functions.  3 hrs 

1.4:   Expansion  of  sinnθ,cosnθ  in  terms  of  sines  and  cosines  of    2 hrs 
multiples of θ and Expansion of sinnθ, cosnθ in powers of sinθ, cosθ 
2  Module‐2: Matrices and Numerical Methods:‐    

2.1:  Types of Matrices(symmetric, skew‐ symmetric, Hermitian,            Skew  9 hrs 


Hermitian,Unitary, Orthogonal Matrices and properties of Matrices).Rank of  a 
 
Matrix  using  Echelon  forms,  reduction  to  normal  form,  PAQ  forms,  system  of 
homogeneous  and  non  –homogeneous  equations,  their  consistency  and   
solutions. Linear dependent and independent vectors.  
 
2.2:   Solution  of  system  of    linear  algebraic  equations,  by  (1)  Gauss 
  
Elimination Method (Review) (2) Guass Jordan Method (3) Crouts Method (LU) 
(4)  Gauss  Seidal  Method    and  (5)  Jacobi  iteration  (Scilab  programming  for  6 hrs 
above methods is to be taught  during lecture hours) 

3  Module‐3:Differential Calculus:‐    

3.1:   Successive  differentiation:  nth  derivative  of  standard  functions.  5 hrs 


Leibnitz’s Thoerem (without proof) and problems.  
 
3.2:  Partial Differentiation: Partial derivatives of first and higher order, total 
7 hrs 
differentials, differentiation of composite and implicit functions. 
 
3.3:  Euler’s  Theorem  on  Homogeneous  functions  with  two  and  three 
independent variables (with proof).Deductions from Euler’s Theorem.  3 hrs 

4  Module‐4:  Application of Partial differentiation, Expansion of  


functions , Indeterminate forms and curve fitting:‐  
 
3.1.:     Maxima and Minima of a function of two independent             variables.  4 hrs 
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers with one constraint. Jacobian, 
Jacobian  of  implicit  function.  Partial  derivative  of    implicit  function  using   
jacobian.  
 
      3.2:            Taylor’s  Theorem(Statement  only)  and  Taylor’s  series,   
6 hrs 
Maclaurin’s  series  (Statement  only).Expansion  of  ex,  sinx,  cosx,  tanx,  sinhx, 
coshx,  tanhx,  log(1+x),  sin‐1x,  cos1x,  Binomial  series.  Indeterminate  forms,  L‐  
Hospital Rule, problems involving series also. 
 
3.3:      Fitting of curves by least square method for linear, parabolic,            and 
5 hrs 
exponential. Regression Analysis(to be introduced for             estimation only) 
(Scilab programming related to fitting of             curves is to be taught during 
lecture hours)  
Recommended Books: 

1: A text book of Applied Mathematics, P.N.Wartikar and J.N.Wartikar,Vol – I and –II by Pune Vidyarthi 
Graha. 

2: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr.B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publication  

3: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley EasternLimited,9thEd. 

4: Matrices by Shanti Narayan. 

5: Numerical by S.S.Sastry, Prentice Hall 

Theory Examination: 

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks. 

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved. 

3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks 
will be asked. 

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules. 

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each  

    Module. 

Term Work: 

General Instructions:  

(1) Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should  

      be as per University pattern for practicals. 

(2) Students must be encouraged to write Scilab Programs in tutorial class only. Each  

     Student has to write at least 4 Scilab tutorials (including print out) and at least 

     6 class tutorials on entire syllabus. 

(3) SciLab Tutorials will be based on (1) Guass Jordan Method (2) Crouts  

Method (LU) (3) Guass Seidal Method and (4) Jacobi iteration (5) Curve Fitting    

for linear, parabolic and exponential functions 
   The distribution of marks for term work will be as follows, 

Attendance (Theory and Tutorial)  :05 marks 

Class Tutorials on entire syllabus   :10 marks 

SciLab Tutorials     :10 

The final certification and acceptance of term‐work ensures the satisfactory 

Performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.   

 
Sub Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEC102 Applied Physics-I 03 01 - 03 0.5 - 3.5

Sub. Subject Name Examination Scheme


Code Theory (out of 75) Term Pract. Oral Total
Internal Assessment (out of 15) End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of Test exam (out
1 and Test 2 of 60)
FEC102 Applied 15 15 15 60 25 - - 100
Physics-I

Detailed Syllabus:

1. CRYSTAL STRUCTURE (15)

Crystallography: Space lattice, Unit Cell, Lattice parameters, Bravais lattices and Crystal systems, Cubic
crystal system & lattices; Density & Packing Fraction; Miller indices of crystallographic planes &
directions; interplanar distance; Diamond structure, NaCl structure, HCP structure, BaTiO3 structure;
Ligancy and Critical radius ratio; Determination of crystal structure using X-ray diffraction techniques
viz. Laue method, rotating crystal method (Bragg method) & powder method; Real crystals & point-
defects; photonic crystals; Liquid crystal phases and application in LCD ( with brief introduction of
optical polarization).

2. SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS (14)

Energy bands of solids and classification of solids; Concepts of holes, effective mass; drift mobility and
conductivity in conductors, intrinsic semiconductors and extrinsic semiconductors; Fermi-Dirac
distribution function and Fermi energy level in a conductor, insulator, intrinsic & extrinsic
semiconductor; Effect of impurity concentration and temperature on the Fermi Level; Hall Effect (applied
electric field along x-axis and applied magnetic field along z-axis) and its application.

Drift and Diffusion of charge carriers across the Energy band structure of P-N Junction leading to
formation of depletion region and potential barrier; concept of carrier current densities in p-n junction in
equilibrium, forward bias and reverse bias; Uses of p-n junction in Light emitting diode (LED),
photoconductors & photovoltaic solar cells.

3. DIELECTRICS & MAGNETIC MATERIALS (09)

Dielectric material, dielectric constant, polarization, polarizability & its types; relative permittivity;
Piezoelectrics, Ferroelectrics, Applications of dielectric materials - Requirement of good insulating
material, some important insulating material.

Origin of magnetization using Atomic Theory; classification of magnetic materials based on


Susceptibility value; Qualitative treatment of Langevin’s and Weiss equation for Dia, Para and Ferro
magnetic materials (no derivation); Microstructure of ferromagnetic solids- Domains and Hysteresis loss;
Soft & hard magnetic materials and their uses; Magnetic circuits and microscopic Ohm’s Law.

4. ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS: (07 )

Introduction to architectural acoustics; reverberation and Sabine’s formula; Common Acoustic defects
and Acoustic Design of a hall

Ultrasonic Waves and their applications; Methods of production of ultrasonic waves (Piezoelectric
Oscillator & Magnetostriction Oscillator)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Books Recommended:

1. A Textbook of Engineering physics - Avadhanulu & Kshirsagar, S.Chand

2. Applied Solid State Physics - Rajnikant, Wiley india

3. Engineering Physics- Uma Mukherji ( third edition), Narosa

4. Engineering Physics - R.K.Gaur & S.L. Gupta, Dhanpat Rai publications

5. Solid State physics - A.J. Dekker, Macmillan Student Edition

6. Modern Engineering Physics – Vasudeva, S.Chand

7. Solid State Physics- Charles kittle, EEE Pbl

8. Concepts of Modern Physics- Arther Beiser, Tata Mcgraw Hill

Suggested Experiments: (Any five)

1. Study of SC, BCC, FCC.

2. Study of Diamond, NaCl ,BaTiO3.

3. Study of HCP structure.


4. Study of Miller Indices Plane and direction.

5. Study of Hall Effect.

6. Determination of energy band gap of semiconductor.

7. Determination of ‘h’ using photocell.

8. Study of Ultrasonic Distance Metre.

9. Determination of losses using hysteresis loop.

10. Study of I / V characteristics of semiconductor diode.

Note: Distribution of marks for term work

1. Laboratory work (Experiments and Journal): 15 marks


2. Assignments :05 marks

3. Attendance (Practical and Theory): 05marks

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 15 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked.

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each Module.

 
 

Sub  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned 


Code 

    Theory  Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract  Tut.  Total

FEC103  Applied  03  01 ‐ 03 0.5  ‐  3.5


Chemistry ‐ I 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme


Code 
Theory (out of 75) Term  Pract.  Oral Total
Work 
Internal Assessment  End sem. 
exam 
(out of 15)  (out of 
Test 1  Test 2 Average of  60) 
Test 1 and 
    Test 2 

FEC103  Applied  15  15 15 60 25 ‐  ‐ 100


Chemistry ‐ I 

Details of the syllabus:‐ 

Sr. No.  Details Hrs

Module 1  Water:  12

• Impurities in water, Hardness of water,  Determination of Hardness of 
water by EDTA method and problems. Softening of water by Hot cold 
lime soda method and problems. Zeolite process and problems. Ion 
Exchange process and problems.  
• Drinking water or Municipal water, Treatments removal of 
microorganisms, by adding Bleaching powder, Chlorination ( no 
breakpoint chlorination), Disinfection by Ozone, Electrodialysis and 
Reverse osmosis, ultra filtration.  
• BOD, COD( def,& significance),  sewage treatments activated sludge 
process, numerical problems related to COD.
Module  Polymers:  12

2  • Introduction to polymers, Thermoplastic and Thermosetting plastic. 
• Ingredients of the plastic (Compounding of plastic.) 
• Fabrication of plastic by Compression, Injection , Transfer, Extrusion 
molding. Preparation, properties and uses of  Phenolformaldehyde, 
PMMA , Kevlar.  
• Effect of heat on the polymers (Glass transition temperatures) 
Polymers in medicine and surgery. 
• Conducting polymers, Industrial polymers. 
Rubbers:  

• Natural rubber (latex), Drawbacks of natural rubber, Compounding of 
rubber (vulcanization of rubber), Preparation, properties and uses of 
Buna‐S, Silicone and Polyurethane rubber.
Module   Lubricants    08

3  • Introduction , Definition, Mechanism of Lubrication,    Classification of 
lubricants, Solid lubricants (graphite & Molybdenum disulphide ) , 
Semisolid lubricants (greases Na base , Li base , Ca base, Axle greases.) , 
Liquid lubricants( blended oils ). 
•  Important properties of lubricants , definition and significance 
,viscosity ,viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud and pour points, 
oiliness, Emulsification,   Acid value and problems, Saponification value 
and problems .                  
Module   Phase Rule                                                                      05

4  • Gibb’s Phase Rule, Explanation, One Component System (Water) , 
Reduced Phase Rule, Two Component System (Pb‐Ag), Limitations of  
Phase Rule.  
Module  Important Engineering Materials 08

5  • Cement‐ Manufacture of Portland Cement, Chemical Composition and 
Constitution of  Portland Cement , Setting and Hardening of Portland 
Cement, Concrete RCC and Decay. Refractories Preparation, 
properties and uses of Silica bricks, Dolomite bricks , Silicon Carbide 
(SiC). 
• Nanomaterials , preparation (Laser and CVD method), properties and 
uses of CNTS              
 

Theory Examination:  

1. Question paper will comprise of total 6 questions, each of 15 marks.  

2. Total four questions need to be solved.  
3. Question ‐ 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks 
will be asked.  

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature ( for example suppose Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 
then part (b) will be form any module other than module 3). 

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture 
hours as mentioned in the syllabus.  

Term work:  

Term work shall consist of minimum five experiments. The distribution of marks for term work shall be 
as follows:  

Laboratory Work (Experiments and journal)    :  10 marks  

Attendance (Practical and Theory)                     :  05 marks  

Assignments                                                        : 10 marks 

Total                                                                    :  25 marks 

The final certification and acceptance of TW ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work 
and minimum passing in the TW. 

Suggested Experiments ‐ Applied Chemistry I

1) To determine total, temporary and permanent hardness of water sample. 

2) Removal of hardness using ion exchange column. 

3) To determine Saponification value of a lubricating oil. 

4) To determine acid value of a lubricating oil. 

5) To determine free acid PH of different solutions using PH meter / Titration.

6) To determine metal ion concentration using colorimeter. 

7) To determine flash point and fire point of a lubricating oil 

8) To determine Chloride content of water by Mohr’s Method. 

9) To determine melting point and/or glass transition temperature of a polymer.  
10) To determine conductance of polymer.

11) To determine the percentage of lime in cement. 

12) Hardening and setting of cement using Vicat’s apparatus 

13) To determine the COD of the given water sample. / Dichromate method.

14) Viscosity by Redwood Viscometer. 

Recommended Books:

1. Engineering Chemistry – Jain & Jain, Dhanpat Rai

2. Engineering Chemistry – Dara & Dara, S Chand

3. Engineering Chemistry – Wiley India (ISBN-9788126519880)

4. A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry – Shashi Chawla (Dhanpat Rai)


 
Sub Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEC104 Engineering 05 02 - 05 01 - 06
Mechanics

Sub. Subject Examination Scheme


Code Name Theory (out of 100) Term Pract. Oral Total
Internal Assessment (out of 20) End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of Test 1 exam
and Test 2 (out of
80)
FEC104 Engineering 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Mechanics

Details of Syllabus:

Sr.No. Topics Hrs

01 1.1 System of Coplanar forces:- 05


Resultant of Concurrent forces, Parallel forces, Non Concurrent
Non Parallel system of forces, Moment of force about a point, Couples,
Varignon’s Theorem. Distributed Forces in plane.

1.2 Center of Gravity and Centroid for plane Laminas. 04

02 2.1 Equilibrium of system of coplanar forces:-


Condition of equilibrium for concurrent forces, parallel forces and Non 06
concurrent Non Parallel general forces and Couples.

2.2 Types of support, loads, Beams, Determination of reactions at supports 04


for various types of loads on beams.

2.3 Analysis of plane trusses by using Method of joints and Method of 04


sections.(Excluding pin jointed frames)

03 3.1 Forces in space: 05


Resultant of Noncoplanar force systems: Resultant of Concurrent force
system, Parallel force system and Nonconcurrent nonparallel force system.
Equilibrium of Noncoplanar force systems: Equilibrium of Concurrent force
system, Parallel force system and Nonconcurrent nonparallel force system.

3.2 Friction: 06
Introduction to Laws of friction, Cone of friction, Equilibrium of bodies on
inclined plane, Application to problems involving wedges, ladders.
04 4.1 Kinematics of Particle: - Velocity & acceleration in terms of rectangular 10
co-ordinate system, Rectilinear motion, Motion along plane curved path,
Tangential & Normal component of acceleration, Motion curves (a-t, v-t, s-t
curves), Projectile motion, Relative velocities.

05 5.1 Kinematics of Rigid Bodies :- Introduction to general plane motion, 06


Instantaneous center of rotation for the velocity, velocity diagrams for bodies
in plane motion, (up to 2 linkage mechanism)

06 6.1 Kinetics of a Particle: Force and Acceleration:- Introduction to basic 04


concepts, D’Alemberts Principle, Equations of dynamic equilibrium, Newton’s
Second law of motion.

6.2 Kinetics of a Particle: Work and Energy: -Principle of Work and 03


Energy, Law of Conservation of Energy.

6.3 Kinetics of a Particle: Impulse and Momentum:-Principle of Linear 03


Impulse and Momentum. Law of Conservation of momentum. Impact and
collision.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks
will be asked.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.( e.g. Suppose Q.2 has part (a) from module 3
then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3 ) having 15 marks each.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral examination:-

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.


Term work:-

Term work shall consist of minimum six experiments, assignments consisting numerical based
on above syllabus, at least 3 numerical from each module.

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiment/ programs and journal) :10 marks

Assignments : 10 marks

Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

List of experiments:-
1. Polygon law of coplanar forces.
2. Non concurrent non parallel (general).
3. Bell crank lever.
4. Support reaction for beam.
5. Simple / compound pendulum.
6. Inclined plane (to determine coefficient of friction).
7. Collision of elastic bodies (Law of conservation of momentum).
8. Moment of Inertia of fly wheel.
9. Screw friction by using screw jack.
Any other experiment based on above syllabus.
Recommended Books

1. Engineering Mechanics by Hibblar, McMillan.


2. Engineering Mechanics by Beer & Johnson, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Engineering Mechanics by Merium, Wiley.
4. Engineering Mechanics by F. L. Singer, Harper & Raw Publication
5. Engineering Mechanics by Macklin & Nelson, Tata McGraw Hill
6. Engineering Mechanics by Shaum Series,
7. Engineering Mechanics by Tayal, Umesh Publication.
Sub Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEC105 Basic Electrical & 04 02 - 04 01 - 05
Electronics
Engineering

Sub. Subject Name Examination Scheme


Code Theory (out of 100) Term Pract. Oral Total
Internal Assessment (out of 20) End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of Test exam (out
1 and Test 2 of 80)
FEC105 Basic 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Electrical &
Electronics
Engineering

Detailed Syllabus:

Module Content Hours

A. Concept of e.m.f, potential difference, current, ohm’s law, resistance, No questions


resistivity, series and parallel connections, power dissipation in resistance, to be asked
effect of temperature on resistance in Theory
Prerequisite B. Capacitors, with uniform and composite medium, energy stored in paper on
capacitor, R-C time constant. Prerequisite
C. Magnetic field, Faraday’s laws of Electromagnetic induction, Hysterics
02
and eddy current losses, energy stored in an inductor, time constant in R-L
circuit.
D.C. circuits: (only independent sources).
Kirchhoff ’s laws, Ideal and practical voltage and current source, Mesh and
Nodal analysis (super node and super mesh excluded), Source
1 transformation, Star-delta transformation ,Superposition theorem, 20
Thevenin’s theorem, Norton’s theorem, Maximum power transfer theorem,
(Source transformation not allowed for Superposition theorem, Mesh and
Nodal analysis)
A.C Circuits :
Generation of alternating voltage and currents, RMS and Average value,
2 form factor , crest factor, AC through resistance, inductance and capacitance, 12
R-L , R-C and R-L-C series and parallel circuits, phasor diagrams , power
and power factor, series and parallel resonance, Q-factor and bandwidth
Three phase circuits :
Three phase voltage and current generation, star and delta connections
3 (balanced load only), relationship between phase and line currents and 10
voltages, Phasor diagrams, Basic principle of wattmeter, measurement of
power by two wattmeter method
Single phase transformer :
4 Construction, working principle, Emf equation, ideal and practical 10
transformer, transformer on no load and on load, phasor diagrams,
equivalent circuit, O.C. and S.C test, Efficiency
Electronics (no numericals):
Semiconductor diode, Diode rectifier with R load: Half wave, full wave–
5 center tapped and bridge configuration, RMS value and average value of 06
output voltage, ripple factor, rectification efficiency, introduction to C and L
filter (no derivation). CE, CB, CC transistor configuration, CE input-output
characteristics.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked.

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each

Module.

List of laboratory experiments (Minimum Six):


1. Mesh and Nodal analysis.
2. Verification of Superposition Theorem.
3. Verification Thevenin’s Theorem.
4. Study of R-L series and R-C series circuit.
5. R-L-C series resonance circuit
6. R-L-C parallel resonance circuit.
6. Relationship between phase and line currents and voltages in 3 – phase System (star & delta)
7. Power and phase measurement in three phase system by two wattmeter method.
8. O.C. and S.C. test on single phase transformer
9. Half wave and full wave rectifier circuits

Recommended Books

Text Books

1. V. N. Mittal and Arvind Mittal “Basic Electrical Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill, (Revised
Edition)
2. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals" by Vincent Del Toro, PHI Second edition ,2011
3. Electronics Devices & Circuit Theory" by Boylestad, Pearson Education India
4. Edward Hughes: Electrical and Electrical Technology, Pearson Education (Tenth edition)
5. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath “Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering”, PHI 13 th
edition 2011.

Reference Books:
1. B.L.Theraja “Electrical Engineering “ Vol-I and II,
2. S.N.Singh, “Basic Electrical Engineering” PHI , 2011

                          

 
 

Sub  Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned


Code

Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total

6 Environmental  02 ‐ ‐ 02 ‐ ‐ 02
studies

Sub.  Subject Name Examination Scheme


Code
Theory (out of 75) Term  Pract. Oral Total
Work
Internal Assessment  End sem. 
exam 
(out of 15) (out of 
Test 1 Test 2 Average of  60)
Test 1 and 
Test 2

6 Environmental  15 15 15 60 ‐ ‐ ‐ 75
studies

Details of the syllabus:‐ 

Sr. No. Details Hrs

Module 1 Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies: 04

• Scope and Importance 
•  Need for Public Awareness 
• Depleting Nature of Environmental resources such as Soil, Water, 
Minerals, and Forests. 
• Global Environmental Crisis related to Population, Water, Sanitation 
and Land. 
• Ecosystem: Concept, Classification, Structure of Ecosystem, overview 
of Food chain, Food web and Ecological Pyramid
Module Sustainable Development 04

2 • Concept of sustainable development 
• Social, Economical and Environmental aspect of sustainable 
development. 
• Control Measures: 3R (Reuse, Recovery, Recycle), Appropriate 
Technology, Environmental education, Resource utilization as per the 
carrying capacity.
Module  Environmental Pollution: 07

3 • Air Pollution: Sources, Effects of air pollution with respect   
to Global Warming, Ozone layer Depletion, Acid Rain,    

Photochemical smog,  Two Control Measures‐  Bag house Filter, 
Venturi scrubber . 

Case Study: Bhopal Gas Tragedy 

• Water Pollution: Sources and Treatment, Concept of waste waters ‐ 
Domestic &Industrial and  treatment. 
            Case Study: Minamata Disease. 

• Land Pollution:  Solid waste, Solid waste Management by Land filling, 
Composting. 
• Noise Pollution; Sources and Effects 
• E‐Pollution: Sources and Effects. 
 

Module  Environmental Legislation: 05

4 • Overview 
•  Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoE&F). Organizational 
structure of MoE&F. 
• Functions and powers of Central Control Pollution Board.  
• Functions and powers of State Control Pollution Board. 
• Environmental Clearance, Consent and Authorization Mechanism. 
• Environmental Protection Act 
• Any two case studies pertaining to Environmental Legislation.
Module Renewable sources of Energy: 05

5 • Limitations of conventional sources of Energy. 
• Various renewable energy sources. 
• Solar Energy: Principle, Working of Flat plate collector & Photovoltaic 
cell.  
• Wind Energy: Principle, Wind Turbines. 

Hydel Energy: Principle, Hydropower generation. 
• Geothermal Energy: Introduction, Steam Power Plant
Module Environment and Technology 05

6 • Role of Technology in Environment and health 
• Concept of Green Buildings, Indoor air pollution 
• Carbon Credit: Introduction, General concept. 
• Disaster Management: Two Events: Tsunami, Earthquakes, Techniques 
of Disaster Management 
• Case Study: Earthquake in Japan 
 

Theory Examination:  

1. Question paper will comprise of total 6 questions, each of 15 marks.  

2. Total four questions need to be solved.  

3. Question Number One will be compulsory and it will be based on entire syllabus wherein sub 
questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked.  

4. Remaining questions i.e Q.2 to Q.6 will be mixed in nature and will be divided in three parts (a),(b) 
&(c) and they will belong to different modules. 

5. In question paper, weight of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours 
as mentioned in the syllabus.  

                                                                 

Recommended Books:  

1. Textbook of Environmental studies by Erach Bharucha, University Press. 
2. Environmental Studies by R.Rajagopalan, Oxford University Press. 
3. Essentials of Environmental Studies by Kurian Joseph &Nagendran, Pearson Education 
4. Renewable Energy by Godfrey Boyle, Oxford Publications. 
5. Perspective Of Environmental Studies, by Kaushik and Kaushik,New Age International 
6.   Environmental Studies by. Anandita Basak, Pearson Education 
7.  Textbook of Environmental Studies by Dave and Katewa, Cengage Learning 
8.  Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph, TataMcGraw Hill 
 

 
Sub Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEL101 Basic Workshop - 04 - - 02 - 02
Practice - I

Sub. Subject Name Examination Scheme


Code Theory Term Pract. Oral Total
Internal Assessment End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of Test exam
1 and Test 2
FEL101 Basic - - - - 50 - - 50
Workshop
Practice-I

Detailed Syllabus Periods

Note: The syllabus and the Term- work to be done during semester I and Semester II is
given together. Individual Instructor for the course is to design the jobs for
practice and demonstration and spread the work over entire two semesters. The
objective is to impart training to help the students develop engineering skill sets.
This exercise also aims in inculcating respect for physical work and hard labor in
addition to some amount of value addition by getting exposed to interdisciplinary
engineering domains.
The two compulsory trades (Sr. No. 1- Fitting and 2 - Carpentry) shall be offered
in separate semesters.
Select any four trade topics (two per semester) out of the topic at Sr. n. 3 to 11.
Demonstrations and hands on experience to be provided during the periods
allotted for the same. Report on the demonstration including suitable sketches is
also to be included in the term – work
1. Fitting (compulsory) 30
• Use and setting of fitting tools for chipping, cutting, filing, marking,
center punching, drilling, tapping.
• Term work to include one job involving following operations : filing to
size, one simple male- female joint, drilling and tapping
2. Carpentry (compulsory) 30
• Use and setting of hand tools like hacksaws, jack planes, chisels and
gauges for construction of various joints, wood tuning and modern wood
turning methods.
• Term work to include one carpentry job involving a joint and report on
demonstration of a job involving wood turning
3. Forging (Smithy) 15
• At least one workshop practice job (Lifting hook and handle) is to be
demonstrated.
4. Welding 15
• Edge preparation for welding jobs. Arc welding for different job like,
Lap welding of two plates, butt welding of plates with simple cover, arc
welding to join plates at right angles.
5. Machine Shop 15
• At least one turning job is to be demonstrated.
6. Electrical board wiring 15
• House wiring, staircase wiring, wiring diagram for fluorescent tube light,
Godown wiring and three phase wiring for electrical motors.

7. PCB Laboratory Exercises 15


Layout drawing, Positive and negative film making, PCB etching and drilling,
Tinning and soldering technique.
8. Sheet metal working and Brazing 15
• Use of sheet metal, working hand tools, cutting , bending , spot welding

9. Plumbing 15
• Use of plumbing tools, spanners, wrenches, threading dies, demonstration
of preparation of a domestic line involving fixing of a water tap and use
of coupling, elbow, tee, and union etc.
10. Masonry 15
• Use of masons tools like trowels, hammer, spirit level, square, plumb line
and pins etc. demonstration of mortar making, single and one and half
brick masonry , English and Flemish bonds, block masonry, pointing and
plastering.
11 Hardware and Networking: 15
• Dismantling of a Personal Computer (PC), Identification of Components of
a PC such as power supply, motherboard, processor, hard disk, memory
(RAM, ROM), CMOS battery, CD drive, monitor, keyboard, mouse,
printer, scanner, pen drives, disk drives etc.
• Assembling of PC, Installation of Operating System (Any one) and Device
drivers, Boot-up sequence. Installation of application software (at least one)
• Basic troubleshooting and maintenance
• Identification of network components: LAN card, wireless card, switch,
hub, router, different types of network cables (straight cables, crossover
cables, rollover cables) Basic networking and crimping.

NOTE: Hands on experience to be given in a group of not more than four


students.

Term work:

Term work shall consist of respective reports and jobs of the trades selected the distribution of marks for
term work shall be as follows.

Laboratory work (Job and Journal) : 40 marks

Attendance (Practical and Theory) : 10 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term – work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory
work.
 

Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


Code 
Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 

FEC201  Applied  04  ‐  01  04  ‐  01  05 


Mathematics‐II 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code 
Theory Marks  TW  Prat  Oral  Total 

Internal Assessment   End sem.   
exam  
Test 1  Test 2  Average of   
Test 1 and 
    Test 2 

FEC201  Applied  20  20  20  80  25  ‐  ‐  125 


Mathematics‐II 

Detailed Syllabus: 

Sr.No.  Topic  Hrs 

1  Prerequiste: Idea of Curve tracing in cartesian, parametric and  polar forms. Straight   
lines,  Circles,  Parabolas,  Hyperbola,  Catenary,  Cissoid,  Astroid,  Cycloid, 
2 hrs 
Lemniscate  of  Bernoulli,  Cardiode.  Concept  of  Solid  Geometry  ‐Planes, 
Spheres, Cones, Cylinders, Paraboloids (Tracing of curves by using SciLab).   

Module‐1: Beta and Gamma functions, Differentiation under Integral sign and exact   
differential equation: 
 
1.1:     Beta and Gamma functions and its properties. Differentiation  under integral 
sign with constant limits of integration.  5 hrs 
1.2:     Rectification of plane curves.  4hrs 

1.3:          Differential  Equation  of  first  order  and  first  degree‐Exact    differential  4 hrs 
equations, Equations reducible to exact equations by           integrating factors. 

2  Module‐2: Differential Calculus   

  2.1:  Linear  differential  equations(Review),  equation  reduciable  to  linear                form,  2 hrs 
Bernoulli’s equation. 
   
2.2: Linear Differential Eqaution with constant coeffiecient‐  Complimentary function, 
  6 hrs 
particular integrals of differential equation of the type f(D)y = X where X is eax,        sin 
  (ax+b), cos (ax+b), xn, eaxV, xV.   

  2.3:  Cauchy’s  homogeneous  linear  differential  equation  and  Legendre’s    4 hrs 


differential equation, Method of variation of parameters. 
   
 
   
2.4:  Simple  application  of  differential  equation  of  first  order  and  second  order  to 
  electrical  and  Mechanical  Engineering  problem  (no  formulation  of  differential  3 hrs 
equation) 
   
  
   
 
   
 
   
Module‐3:  Numerical  solution  of  ordinary  differential  equations  of  first  order  and 
3   
first degree  and   Multiple Integrals‐ 
 
3.1 :(a)Taylor’s series method    (b)Euler’s method  
 
       (c)  Modified  Euler  method    (d)  Runga‐Kutta  fourth  order  formula  (SciLab 
programming is to be taught during lecture hours)   5 hrs 

3.2:Multiple  Integrals‐Double  integration‐definition,  Evaluation  of  Double  Integrals,  10 hrs 


Change of order of integration, Evaluation of double integrals by changing the order 
 
of integration and changing to polar form (Examples on change of variables by using 
Jacobians only).   
4  Module ‐4:Multiple Integrals with Application and Numerical Integration:‐   

4.1: Triple integration –definition and evaluation (Cartesian, cylindrical  and spherical  3 hrs 
polar coordinates). 
 
 4.2: Application to double integrals to compute Area, Mass, Volume. Application of 
5 hrs 
triple integral to compute volume. 
 
4.3:  Numerical  integration‐Different  type  of  operators  such  as  shift,  forward, 
backward difference and their relation. Interpolation, Newton  iterpolation, Newton‐ 7 hrs 
Cotes  formula(with  proof).      Integration  by  (a)  Trapezoidal  (b)  Simpson’s  1/3rd  (c) 
Simpson’s  3/8th    rule  (all  with  proof).  (Scilab  programming  on  (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  is  to  be 
taught during lecture hours)  

Recommended Books: 

1: A text book of Applied Mathematics, P. N. Wartikar and J. N. Wartikar, Vol –I and II by 

    Pune Vidyarthi Graha. 

2: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr.B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication  

3: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,9th Ed. 

4: Numerical Analysis by S.S.Sastry, Prentice Hall 

5: Differential Equations, Sheply Ross, Wiley India. 

Theory Examination: 

1. Question paper will comprise of 6questions, each carrying 20 marks. 

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved. 

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked. 

4: Remaining question should be randomly selected from all the modules. 

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each  module. 

 
 

Term Work: 

General Instructions:  

(1) Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be  

     as per University pattern for practicals. 

(2) Students must be encouraged to write Scilab Programs during the tutorials. Each student has to write 
at least 5 Scilab tutorials (including print out) and at least 5 class tutorials on entire syllabus. 

(3)  SciLab  Tutorials  will  be  based  on  (1)Curve  Tracing  (2)  from  module3  on  (a)Taylor’s  series  method 
(b)Euler’s  method  (c)  Modified  Euler  method  (d)  Runga‐Kutta  fourth  order  formula  (4)  ordinary 
differential equation and (5) Trapezoidal ,Simpson’s 1/3rd and Simpson’s 3/8th rule. 

The distribution of marks for term work will be as follows, 

Attendance (Theory and Tutorial)  : 05 marks 

Class Tutorials on entire syllabus   : 10 marks 

SciLab Tutorials     : 10 

The final certification and acceptance of term‐work ensures the satisfactory performance  

of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work. 

 
  

Subject Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned


Code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEC202 Applied Physics - II 03 01 - 03 0.5 - 3.5

Sub. Subject Examination Scheme


Code Name Theory Term Prat. Oral Total
Internal Assessment End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of Test exam
1 and Test 2
FEC202 Applied 15 15 15 60 25 - - 100
Physics - II

1. INTERFERENCE AND DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT (15)

Interference in thin film - Introduction, interference due to reflected and transmitted light by thin
transparent parallel film; origin of colours in thin film; Wedge shaped thin film; Newton’s rings;

Applications of interference - Determination of thickness of very thin wire or foil, determination of


refractive index of liquid, wavelength of incident light , radius of curvature of lens, testing of surface
flatness, non-reflecting films, Highly reflecting film

Diffraction of Light – Introduction; Fraunhoffer diffraction at single slit ; Fraunhoffer diffraction at


ouble slit; diffraction due to N- slits ( Diffraction Grating), missing orders, Highest possible orders;
determination of wavelength of light with a plane transmission grating; resolving power of a grating;
dispersive power of a grating.

2. FIBRE OPTICS AND LASERS: (09)

Fibre optics : Introduction, total internal reflection, basic construction, optical fibre as light guide and
types of optical fibre; Numerical Aperture and maximum angle of acceptance, Numerical Aperture for
graded index fibre; V-number, Maximum number of possible orders; Losses in optical fibre; Merits of
optical fibre; Applications.

Lasers : Quantum processes as absorption, spontaneous emission and stimulated emission; metastable
states, population inversion, pumping, resonance cavity, Einsteins’s equations; Helium Neon laser;
Nd:YAG laser; Semiconductor laser,

Applications of laser- Holography (construction and reconstruction of holograms) and other applications.
3. QUANTUM MECHANICS: (08)

Introduction, Wave particle duality, de Broglie wavelength; experimental verification of de


Broglie theory; properties of matter waves; wave packet, group velocity and phase velocity; Wave
function, Physical interpretation of wave function; Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle; Electron
diffraction experiment and Gama ray microscope experiment; Applications of uncertainty principle;
Schrodinger’s time dependent wave equation, time independent wave equation, - Motion of free particle,
Particle trapped in one dimensional infinite potential well.

4. MOTION OF CHARGED PARTICLE IN ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS - (03)

Electrostatic focusing; Magnetostatic focusing; Cathode ray tube (CRT); Cathod ray Oscilloscope (CRO);
Application of of CRO,

5. SUPERCONDUCTIVITY: (03)

Introduction, Meissner Effect; Type I and Type II superconductors; BCS Theory(concept of Cooper pair);
Josephson effect; Applications of superconductors- SQUID, MAGLEV

6. NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY (07)

Introduction to nano-science and nanotechnology; Two main approaches in nanotechnology -


Bottom up technique and top down technique; Tools used in nanotechnology such as Scanning electron
microscope, Scanning Tunneling Microscope, Atomic Force Microscope.

Nano materials: Methods to produce nanomaterials; Applications of nanomaterials; Different forms of


carbon nanoparticles, carbon nanotubes, properties and applications.

Books Recommended:

1. A Textbook of Engineering physics - Avadhanulu & Kshirsagar, S.Chand

2. Engineering Physics- Uma Mukherji ( third edition), Narosa

3. Engineering Physics - R.K.Gaur & S.L. Gupta, Dhanpat Rai publications

4. Modern Engineering Physics – Vasudeva, S.Chand

5. Concepts of Modern Physics- Arther Beiser, Tata Mcgraw Hill

6. A textbook of Optics - N. Subramanyam and Brijlal, S.Chand

7. Optics - Ajay Ghatak, Tata Mc Graw Hill

8. Intoduction to Nanotechnology- Charles P. Poole, Jr., Frank J. Owens,Wiley India edition

9. Nano: The Essential – T. Pradeep, Mcgraw-Hill Education


Suggested Experiments: (Any five)

1. Determination of radius of curvature of a lens using Newton’s ring set up

2. Determination of diameter of wire/hair or thickness of paper using Wedge shape film method.

3. Determination of wavelength using Diffracion grating.(Hg/ Na source)

4. Determination of number of lines on the grating surface using Diffracion grating.

5. Determination of Numerical Aperture of an optical fibre.

6. Determination of wavelength using Diffracion grating.(Laser source)

7. Use of CRO for measurement of frequency and amplitude.

8. Use of CRO for measurement of phase angle.

9. Study of divergence of laser beam

10. Determination of width of a slit using single slit diffraction experiment(laser source)

Note: Distribution of marks for term work

1. Laboratory work (Experiments and Journal) : 15 marks

2. Assignments : 05 marks

2. Attendance (Practical and Theory): 05marks

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 15 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked.

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each

Module.
 

Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


Code 
Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 

FEC203  Applied  03  01  ‐  03  0.5    3.5 


Chemistry ‐II 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code 
Theory Marks  TW  Prat  Oral  Total 

Internal Assessment   End sem.   
exam  
Test 1  Test 2  Average of   
Test 1 and 
    Test 2 

FEC203  Applied  15  15  15  60  25  ‐  ‐  100 


Chemistry ‐II 

Details of the syllabus:‐ 

Details  Hrs 

Module 1:  10 

 Corrosion :  

• Introduction: Types of Corrosion (I) Dry or Chemical Corrosion  i) Due to oxygen ii) 
due to other gases. (II) Wet or Electrochemical Corrosion :‐ Mechanism i) Evolution of 
hydrogen type ii) Absorption of oxygen. Types of Electro‐Chemical Corrosion –
Galvanic cell corrosion, Concentration cell corrosion (differential aeration), pitting 
corrosion, Intergranular corrosion, Stress Corrosion , Polarization. 
•  Factors affecting the rate of corrosion :‐ Nature of metal, position in galvanic series, 
potential difference, overvoltage, relative area of the anodic and cathodic parts, 
purity of metal, nature of the corrosion product, temperature, moisture, influence of 
PH, concentrations of the electrolytes. 
• Methods to Decrease the rate of Corrosion :‐ Proper designing, using pure metal, 
using metal alloys, Cathodic protection – i) Sacrificial anodic protection, ii) Impressed 
current method, Anodic protection method, Metallic coatings, hot dipping , 
galvanizing, tinning, metal cladding, metal spraying, Electroplating, Cementation, 
Organic Coatings ,Paints  only constituents and their functions.   
Module 2  :    09 

Alloys :  

•  Introduction, purpose of making alloys,  Ferrous Alloys, plain carbon steel, heat 
resisting steels, stainless steels (corrosion resistant steels), effect of the alloying 
element, Ni, Cr, Co, Mg, Mo, W, and V. 
• Non‐Ferrous Alloys‐ Alloys of Al – i) Duralumin ii) Magnalumin. Alloys of Cu‐Brasses 
– i) Commercial brass ii) German Silver. Bronzes – i) Gun metal ii) High – phosphorus 
bronze.  Alloys of pb – i) Wood’s metal. ii) Tinman’s solders. Their composition 
(Reference 1 by Jain & Jain ), properties & uses.  
• Powder Metallurgy :‐ Introduction, methods of metal powder formation (1) (a) 
Mechanical pulverization (b) Atomization (c) Chemical reduction (d) Electrolytic 
process (e) Decomposition.  (2) Mixing & blending (3) Sintering. (4) Compacting :‐ 
Various methods such as i) cold pressing. ii) Powder injection moulding. iii) Hot 
compaction. 
•  Applications of powder metallurgy. 
• Manufacture of oxide & non‐oxide ceramic powders only i) Alumina ii) Silicon 
Carbide  
Module  3 :   12 

Fuels  

• Definition, Classification of fuels – solid, Liquid & Gaseous. Calorific value – def. 
Gross or Higher C.V. & Net or lower C.V. units of heat (no conversions). Dulong’s 
formula & numericals for calculations of Gross & Net C.V. Analysis of coal – i) 
Proximate Analysis with numericals and its importance ii) Ultimate Analysis with 
numericals and its importance, Characteristic properties of the good fuel.  
• Liquid Fuels – Crude petroleum oil; its composition & classification & mining (in 
brief).  Refining of crude oil i) separation of water ii) Separation of ‘S’ & iii) 
Fractional distillation with diagram &  composition table.  
• Cracking – Definition; Types of cracking – I) Thermal Cracking– (a) Liquid phase 
thermal cracking b) Vapour phase thermal cracking. II) Catalytic Cracking – (a) Fixed 
– bed catalytic cracking (b) Moving – bed catalytic cracking.  Advantages of Catalytic 
Cracking. 
• Petrol : Refining of petrol, unleaded petrol (MTBE use of 
            catalytic converter), power alcohol. Knocking, Octane  

             number (antiknocking agents), Cetane number  

• Combustion: calculations for requirement of only oxygen & air (by weight & by 
volume only) for given solid, liquid & gaseous fuels.  
• Bio‐diesel, Method to obtain Biodiesel from vegetable oils (Trans‐esterification), 
advantages and disadvantages of Biodiesel. 
• Propellants: Definition,  Characteristics of a good propellant, classification of 
propellants, Two examples each. 
 Module 4 :   10 

Composite Materials and Adhesives :  

• Introduction, Constitution i) Matrix phase ii) Dispersed phase.  Characteristic 
properties of composite materials Classification – A) Particle – reinforced composites 
i) Large – particle composites ii) Dispersion – strengthened Composites. B) Fiber – 
Reinforced Composites (i) Continuous aligned (ii) Discontinuous (short) (a) aligned (b) 
Randomly oriented. (C) Structural Composites – (i) Laminates (ii) Sandwich Panels.  
Adhesives :  

• Introduction, Adhesive action, Physical Factors                      Influencing Adhesive 
action,  Chemical  Factors Influencing, Adhesive action, Bonding Processes by 
adhesives. 
Module 5 :  04 

Green Chemistry:  

• Introduction, Twelve Principles of Green chemistry, numericals on atom economy, 
synthesis , adipic acid and indigo.  
• Green solvents (ionic liquid supercritical CO2),  and products from natural materials. 
   Theory Examination:  

1. Question paper will comprise of total 6 questions, each of 15 marks.  

2. Total four questions need to be solved.  

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks 
will be asked.  
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature ( for example suppose Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 
then part (b) will be form any module other than module 3. 

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture 
hours as mentioned in the syllabus.  

Term work:  

Term work shall consist of minimum five experiments. The distribution of marks for term work shall be 
as follows:  

Laboratory Work (Experiments and journal)    :  10 marks  

Attendance (Practical and Theory)                     :  05 marks  

Assignments                                                            : 10 marks 

Total                                                                         :  25marks 

The final certification and acceptance of TW ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work 
and minimum passing in the TW. 

Suggested Experiments   Applied Chemistry‐II 

Estimation of Zn Complexometric titration. 
Estimation of Ni complexometric titration. 
Estimation of Al complexometric titration. 
Calorific value of solid or liquid fuel using Bomb Calorimeter. 
Preparation of membranes for filter any one Demon. 
CO2 from air by Orsats method. 
Estimation of Fe from plain C steel. 
Estimation of Ni by gravimetric method.  
Estimation of Sn iodometrically. 
Preparation of Bio diesel from edible oil.  
Synthesis of simple layered materials and their characterization.  
Preparing simple composites and their characterization. 
Estimation of Cu iodometrically. 
Estimate %  of Moisture from coal. 
To de4termine the E cell of Cu‐Zn system by potentiometry.  
Recommended Books:  

1. Engineering Chemistry – Jain & Jain, Dhanpat Rai  
2. Engineering Chemistry – Dara & Dara, S Chand  
3. Engineering Chemistry – Wiley India (ISBN‐9788126519880) 
4. A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry – Shashi Chawla (Dhanpat Rai) 
Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 
Code  Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 
FEC204  Engineering Drawing  03  04  ‐  03  02  ‐  05 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code  Theory  Marks  Term  Pract Oral  Total 
Internal Assessment   End sem.  Work  .   
Test 1  Test 2  Average of Test  exam    
    1 and Test 2 
FEC204  Engineering  15  15  15  60  25  50  ‐  150 
Drawing 

Preamble

Considering the recent practices in industries and easy availability of software this conventional drawing
may be totally converted in to AutoCAD from the next revision.

Objective of the course

1) Students should be able to visualize the objects.


2) They should be able to understand and read drawing.
3) They should be able to present the same.

Module Details Hrs


Introduction to Engineering Drawing. Types of Lines, Dimensioning Systems as per
IS conventions.
Engineering Curves: Basic construction of Cycloid, Involutes and Helix( of cylinder)
1 3
only
**Introduction to Auto CAD:- Basic Drawing and Editing Commands. Knowledge
of setting up layers, Dimensioning, Hatching, plotting and Printing.
Projection of Points and Lines:-Lines inclined to both the Reference Planes.
(Excluding Traces).
2 @Projection of Planes: Triangular, Square, Rectangular, Pentagonal, Hexagonal and 6
Circular planes inclined to either HP or VP only. (Exclude composite planes)
Projection of Solids: - (Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder, Cone only) Solid projection with
the axis inclined to HP and VP. (Exclude Spheres , Composite and Hollow solids)..
Use change of position or Auxiliary plane method
Section of solids:- section of Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder, &Cone , cut by plane
perpendicular to at least one reference plane.( Exclude Curved section Plane). Use
3 14
change of position or Auxiliary plane method

Development of Surfaces:- Lateral surface development of Prism, Pyramid,


Cylinder, Cone with section plane inclined to HP or VP only. (Exclude Reverse
Development)
Orthographic projections:-
• Different views of a simple machine part as per the first angle projection
4 method recommended by I.S. 12
• Full or Half Sectional views of the Simple Machine parts.
• **Drawing of orthographic projections using Auto CAD.
Isometric Projections: Isometric projection/Drawing of blocks (plain and cylindrical
excluding spheres).
• **Drawing of Isometric projections using Auto CAD.
• @Reading of orthographic projections. (Only for TW)
5 • *Orthographic Reading using Auto CAD. 10
**Introduction to 3D in AutoCAD
Working in 3-dimensions, Viewing 3D Objects, Basic wireframe models, Extruding,
simple revolved objects. Boolean operations.
Generation of orthographic projections from 3D drawing.

**Should be covered during Auto CAD practical.

@ only in Term Work.(i.e:-Questions will not be asked for the examination.)

Term Work:

Component-1

Sheet-1: Projection of Solids (2 problems) + Section and Development of solid surfaces

(2 problem)

Sheet -2: Orthographic projection without section (2 problems).

Sheet -3: Orthographic projection with section (2 problems).

Sheet- 4: Isometric Projections (3 problems).


Component -2

One A-3 size sketch book consisting of:-

1) 3 problems each from Projection of Curves, Lines, Planes and Solids.


2) 3 problems from Section and Development of Solids.
3) 2 problems each from the Orthographic Projections (with Section), Reading of orthographic
projections and Isometric projections.

Component-3

Printouts of minimum 2 problems (preferably in A3 size sheet) each from:

1) Simple Orthographic Projections.


2) Orthographic Projections – Section.
3) Isometric projections.
4) Reading of Orthographic Projections

Note:- 2 hrs /week Auto CAD Practical is essential for completing the Auto CAD Drawings and take
required printouts.

AutoCAD Examination: (2hrs):

1) Minimum 1 problem from 1 or 2 or 4 of component-3 and


2) Minimum 1 problem from 3 of component-3.
3) Print out of the Answers have to be taken preferably in A3 size sheets and should be
assessed by External examiner. Knowledge of concepts and accuracy of drawing should be
considered during evaluation.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 15 marks.

2. Only 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus.

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each

Module.
Text Books.

1) N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing (Plane and solid geometry)”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd.

2) N.D. Bhatt & V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

References.

1) M.B Shah & B.C Rana, “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Publications.

2) P.J. Shah, “Engineering Graphics”, S Chand Publications.

3) Dhananjay A Jolhe, “Engineering Drawing” Tata McGraw Hill

4) Prof. Sham Tickoo (Purdue University) & Gaurav Verma, “( CAD Soft Technologies) : Auto
CAD 2012 (For engineers and Designers)”, Dreamtech Press NewDelhi.

 
 

                          
 

Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


Code 
Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 

FEC205  Structured Programming  04  02  ‐  04  01  ‐  05 


Approach 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code 
Theory Marks  TW  Prat  Oral  Total 

Internal Assessment   End sem.   
exam  
Test 1  Test 2  Av. of Test 1   
& Test 2 
   

FEC205  Structured  20  20  20  80  25  25  ‐  150 


Programming 
Approach 

Primary Objectives of this subject

This subject aims to provide students with an understanding of the role computation can play in solving
problems. The course will be taught using C programming language.

Program Education Objectives

After completing this course, students will be able to:

z Understand classical problem solving strategies and use them in solving problems that can be
implemented using a programming language.
z Identify a problem that requires a programmed solution.
z Use structured approach to describe the solution concept.
z Understand concept of data types and variables using C.
z Use common operators in C to solve a problem.
z Implement conditional statements in C .
z Implement looping constructs in C.
z Implement functions in C.
z Use simple and structured data types in C to solve given problem
z Implement simple problems using files and pointers
Detail Syllabus
Unit Unit Number of Hours
No
1 Problem definition 02
2 Algorithms
2.1 Developing Algorithms 05
2.2 Efficiency of Algorithms 01

3 Expressing Algorithm – Sequence


3.1 Expressions in C; Arithmetic and Boolean expressions 03
3.2 Use of Standard functions 01
3.3 Assignment statement 01
3.4 Input and output 02

4 Concept of scalar Data Types 04


4.1 scalar data types in C , Scope and life time, type
conversion

5 Expressing Algorithms – Iteration


5.1 Ordering a solution in a loop 02
5.2 C- Control structures for Iteration 06

6 Expressing Algorithms – Selection 01


6.1 C-Control structures for selection 02

7 Decomposition of solution 01
7.1 Defining Functions in C 02
7.2 Functions and parameters 02
7.3 Introduction to recursive functions 02

8 Additional C data types


8.1 Arrays – single and multi dimensional 03
8.2 Strings 02
8.3 Structures 02
8.3 Files 02
8.4 Pointers 02

Books:

Text:

1. programming in C ; second edition; Pradeep Day and Manas Gosh ;Oxford University Press
2011

2. C Programming with Problem solving ; Jacqueline A. Jones & Keith Harrow – Dreamtech India–
Scott Jones California USA
Reference

1. Introduction to Engineering programming – James Paul Hollowat – John Wiley ISBN 9812-53-
022-3

2. Introduction to programming and problem solving ; G. Michael Schneider ; Wiley India edition;

Laboratory Assignments

1. Students are expected to solve and execute at least 20 programming problems based on above
syllabus.

2. Journal work should comprise of writing the problem definition, solution of problem either as
Algorithm or flow chart and source code in C (preferably hand written) for all the 20 problems.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.

3: Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 3 marks will be asked.

4: Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

5: Weightage of marks should be proportional to number of hours assigned to each

Module.
 

Subject  Subject Name  Teaching Scheme  Credits Assigned 


Code 
Theory  Pract.  Tut.  Theory  TW/Pract  Tut.  Total 

FEC206  Communication  02  02  ‐  02  01  ‐  03 


Skills 

Sub.  Subject Name  Examination Scheme   


Code 
Theory  TW  Prat  Oral  Total 

Internal Assessment  End sem.   
exam  
Test 1  Test 2  Average of   
Test 1 & 2 
   

FEC206  Communication  10  10  10  40  25  ‐  ‐  75 


Skills 

S.No  Topic  No. of 


lectures 

1.  Communication Theory: The communication process, objectives, barriers to  12 


communication, methods of communication, formal and informal channels of 
communication in a business organization, techniques to improve communication 
(Listening, speaking, reading, writing) 

2.  Grammar and Vocabulary: Pairs of confused words, common errors, use of articles,  3 
prepositions, apostrophes, agreement of the verb with the subject, one‐word 
substitution, synonyms and antonyms 
3.  Business Correspondence: Principles of business correspondence, parts of a  9 
business letter, formats (Full‐block/Complete block, Modified block, Semi‐block), 
types of letters: Enquiry letters and replies to enquiry (enquiry about a product, 
service or information, asking for a quotation, placing an order and replies to the 
same) letters of Claim and Adjustment. 
4.  Summarization and Comprehension: Technical and industry‐oriented passages (not  3 
less than 400 words) 
5.  Technical writing : Framing definitions, writing instructions, language exercises  3 
based on types of expositions (description of an object, explanation of a process) 
 
Note: Two tests are prescribed for internal assessment. The first test should be conducted in the form of 
a three‐minute public speech.  The second test should be based on theory and application exercises 
based on the syllabus.  
 
Term work: 25 marks 
Assignments: 20 marks 
Attendance: 05 marks 
 
List of assignments:  
Summarization & Comprehension 
Grammar practice 
Communication theory: Application exercises 
Barriers to Communication 
Principles of Business Correspondence 
Formats of business letters 
Types of letters 
Technical writing  
 
Recommended reference books for Communication Skills:  
Business Communication by Urmila Rai & S.M. Rai, Himalaya Publishing House 
Communication Skills by Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta Sharma, Oxford University Press 
Business Correspondence & Report‐writing by R.C.Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata McGraw‐Hill Education 
Effective Technical Communication by Ashraf Rizvi, Tata McGraw‐Hill 
Technical Writing & Professional Communication for non‐native speakers of English by Thomas N.Huckin 
& Leslie A.Olsen, McGraw‐Hill 
Mastering Communication by Nicky Stanton, Palgrave Master Series 
 
Paper pattern 
Total Marks: 40,   Duration : 2 hours 
Distribution of marks and weightage:  
The paper will comprise 6 questions of 10 marks each out of which 4 need to be attempted.
The first question is compulsory and will be a combination of all modules.
Students can attempt any 3 out of the remaining 5 questions.
The first module (Communication theory) will carry 40 % weightage.
Questions 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be based on combinations of two or more modules.
 
Sub Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract Tut. Total
FEL201 Basic Workshop - 04 - - 02 - 02
Practice-II

Sub. Subject Name Examination Scheme


Code Theory Term Pract. Oral Total
Internal Assessment End sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Average of exam
Test 1 &
Test 2
FEL201 Basic Workshop - - - - 50 - - 50
Practice-II

Detailed Syllabus is given in Basic Workshop Practice-I

Term work:

Term work shall consist of respective reports and jobs of the trades selected the distribution of marks for
term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Job and Journal) : 40 marks

Attendance (Practical and Theory) : 10 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term – work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory
work.

 
      

AC 29/4/2013 Item no. 4.79

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Revised Syllabus
Program -Bachelor of Engineering

Course ‐Instrumentation Engineering  

(Second Year – Sem. III & IV) 

Under 

FACULTY OF TECHNOLOGY 

(As per Credit Based Semester and Grading System from 2013-14)

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      1                 
      

From Dean’s Desk:


To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of
quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the
outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Technology of University of
Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome based education in the process of
curriculum development.
Faculty of Technology, University of Mumbai, in one of its meeting unanimously resolved that, each
Board of Studies shall prepare some Program Educational Objectives (PEO’s) and give freedom to
affiliated Institutes to add few (PEO’s) and course objectives and course outcomes to be clearly defined
for each course, so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of
course to be taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. It was also resolved that, maximum
senior faculty from colleges and experts from industry to be involved while revising the curriculum. I am
happy to state that, each Board of studies has adhered to the resolutions passed by Faculty of Technology,
and developed curriculum accordingly. In addition to outcome based education, semester based credit and
grading system is also introduced to ensure quality of engineering education.
Semester based Credit and Grading system enables a much-required shift in focus from teacher-centric to
learner-centric education since the workload estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and
not in teaching. It also focuses on continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education.
University of Mumbai has taken a lead in implementing the system through its affiliated Institutes and
Faculty of Technology has devised a transparent credit assignment policy and adopted ten points scale to
grade learner’s performance. Credit assignment for courses is based on 15 weeks teaching learning
process, however content of courses is to be taught in 12-13 weeks and remaining 3-2 weeks to be utilized
for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus etc.

Credit and grading based system was implemented for First Year of Engineering from the academic year
2012-2013. Subsequently this system will be carried forward for Second Year Engineering in the
academic year 2013-2014, for Third Year and Final Year Engineering in the academic years 2014-2015
and 2015-2016 respectively.

 
 
Dr. S. K. Ukarande 
Dean,  
Faculty of Technology,  
Member ‐ Management Council, Senate, Academic Council 
University of Mumbai, Mumbai 
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      2                 
      

Preamble:
The overall technical education in our country is changing rapidly in manifolds. Now it is very
much challenging to maintain the quality of education with its rate of expansion. To meet present
requirement a systematic approach is necessary to build the strong technical base with the
quality. Accreditation will provide the quality assurance in higher education and also to achieve
recognition of the institution or program meeting certain specified standards. The main focus of
an accreditation process is to measure the program outcomes, essentially a range of skills and
knowledge that a student will have at the time of graduation from the program that is being
accredited. Faculty of Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating
philosophy of outcome based education in the process of curriculum development.

I, as Chairman, Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering of University of Mumbai, happy to


state here that, Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) were finalized for undergraduate
program in Electrical Engineering, more than twenty senior faculty members from the different
institutes affiliated to University of Mumbai were actively participated in this process. Few PEOs
were finalized for undergraduate program in Electrical Engineering are listed below;

• To provide the overall strong technical foundation to formulate, solve and analyse
engineering problems during undergraduate program.
• To prepare students to demonstrate an ability to identify, formulate and solve electrical
based issues.
• To prepare students to demonstrate ability in the area of design, control, analyse and
interpret the electrical and electronics systems.
• To prepare students for successful career in industry, research and development.
• To develop the ability among students for supervisory control and data acquisition for
power system application.
• To provide opportunity for students to handle the multidisciplinary projects.
• To create the awareness of the life-long learning and to introduce them to professional
ethics and codes of professional practice.
The affiliated institutes may include their own PEOs in addition to the above list to support the
philosophy of outcome based education, in addition to stated PEOs, objectives and expected

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      3                 
      

outcomes are also included in the curriculum. I know, this is a small step taken to enhance and
provide the quality education to the stake holders.

Dr. M. V. Bhatkar
Chairman,
Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering,
University of Mumbai

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      4                 
      

Semester III
Subject Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
Code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC301 Applied Mathematics-
III * 4 - 1 4 - 1 5

ISC302 Electrical Network -


Analysis and Synthesis 4 2 - 4 1 5
ISC303 Analog Electronics 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC304 Digital Electronics 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC305 Transducers-I 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC306 Object oriented
programming and - 4* - - 2 - 2
methodology *
TOTAL 20 12 1 20 6 1 27

* Out of four hours, 2 hours theory shall be taught to entire class followed by 2 hrs. practical in
batches.

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Pract.
Sub Code Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
and Oral Total
Sem work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. oral
exam
ISC301 Applied
20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
Mathematics-III *
ISC302 Electrical Network
Analysis and 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
Synthesis
ISC303 Analog Electronics 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150
ISC304 Digital Electronics 20 20 20 80 25 - 125
ISC305 Transducers-I 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150
ISC306 Object oriented
programming and - - - - 25 50 - 75
methodology *
TOTAL 100 400 150 100 - 750
* Common for Electrical, Bio-medical Engineering, Instrumentation, Electronics and
Electronics & Telecommunication branches.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      5                 
      

Semester IV
Subject Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
Code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC401 Applied Mathematics-
4 - 1 4 - 1 5
IV *
ISC402 Feedback Control
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
System
ISC403 Electrical Technology
and Instruments 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC404 Communication System
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC405 Transducers-II 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
ISC406 Application Software
- 4* - - 2 - 2
Practices
Total 20 12 1 20 6 1 27
* Out of four hours, 2 hours theory shall be taught to entire class followed by 2 hrs. practical in
batches.

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Pract.
Sub Code Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
and Oral Total
Sem work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. exam
ISC401 Applied
20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
Mathematics-IV *
ISC402 Feedback Control
20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
System
ISC403 Electrical
Technology and 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Instruments
ISC404 Communication
System 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
ISC405 Transducers-II 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150
ISC406 Application Software
- - - - 25 25 - 50
Practices
TOTAL 100 400 150 50 50 750
* Common for Electrical, Bio-medical Engineering, Instrumentation, Electronics and
Electronics & Telecommunication branches.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      6                 
      

Sub Subject Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credit Assigned


code Name Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC301 Applied
Mathematics- 4 - 1 4 - 1 5
III

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Applied Mathematics-
ISC301 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
III

Course pre-requisite:
FES 101: Applied Mathematics I
FES 201: Applied Mathematics II

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC301 Applied Mathematics-III 05

Course Objectives • To provide students with a sound foundation in Mathematics and


prepare them for graduate studies in Instrumentation Engineering
• To provide students with mathematics fundamental necessary to
formulate, solve and analyze engineering problems.
• To provide opportunity for students to work as part of teams on
multi disciplinary projects.
Course Outcomes • Students will demonstrate basic knowledge of Laplace Transform.
Fourier series, Bessel Functions, Vector Algebra and Complex
Variable.
• Students will demonstrate an ability to identify formulate and solve
Instrumentation Engineering related problem using Applied
Mathematics.
• Students will show the understanding of impact of engineering
mathematics on Instrumentation Engineering.
• Students will be able to participate and succeed in competitive
exams like GATE, GRE.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      7                 
      

Module Unit Topics Hrs.


No. No.

1. 0 Laplace Transform 12

1.1 Laplace Transform (LT) of Standard Functions: Definition.


unilateral and bilateral Laplace Transform, LT of sin(at), cos(at),
e at ,t n ,
sinh(at), cosh(at), erf(t), Heavi-side unit step, dirac-delta
function, LT of periodic function

1.2 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, first shifting theorem,


n
second shifting theorem, multiplication by t , division by t ,
Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, change of scale,
convolution theorem, initial and final value theorem, Parsavel’s
identity

1.3 Inverse Laplace Transform: Partial fraction method, long division


method, residue method

1.4 Applications of Laplace Transform: Solution of ordinary


differential equations

2.0 Fourier Series 10

2.1 Introduction: Definition, Dirichlet’s conditions, Euler’s formulae

2.2 Fourier Series of Functions: Exponential, trigonometric functions,


even and odd functions, half range sine and cosine series

2.3 Complex form of Fourier series, orthogonal and orthonormal set of


functions, Fourier integral representation

3.0 Bessel Functions 08

3.1 Solution of Bessel Differential Equation: Series method, recurrence


relation, properties of Bessel function of order +1/2 and -1/2

3.2 Generating function, orthogonality property

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      8                 
      

3.3 Bessel Fourier series of functions

4.0 Vector Algebra 12

4.1 Scalar and Vector Product: Scalar and vector product of three and
four vectors and their properties

4.2 Vector Differentiation: Gradient of scalar point function, divergence


and curl of vector point function

4.3 Properties: Solenoidal and irrotational vector fields, conservative


vector field

4.4 Vector Integral: Line integral, Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss’


divergence theorem, Stokes’ theorem

5.0 Complex Variable 10

5.1 Analytic Function: Necessary and sufficient conditions, Cauchy


Reiman equation in polar form

5.2 Harmonic function, orthogonal trajectories

5.3 Mapping: Conformal mapping, bilinear transformations, cross ratio,


fixed points, bilinear transformation of straight lines and circles

Total 52

Text books:

1. P. N. Wartikar and J. N. Wartikar, “A Text Book of Applied Mathematic”, Vol. I & II,
Vidyarthi Griha Prakashan
2. A. Datta, “Mathematical Methods in Science and Engineering”, 2012
3. B.S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publication
Reference Books:

1. B. S. Tyagi, “Functions of a Complex Variable,” Kedarnath Ram Nath Publication


2. B. V. Ramana, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publication
3. Wylie and Barret, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill 6th Edition
4. Erwin Kreysizg, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc
5. Murry R. Spieget, “Vector Analysis”, Schaum’s outline series, Mc-Graw Hill Publication

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      9                 
      

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of
both the tests will be considered for final Internal Assessment.

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.


2. The students need to solve total 4 questions.
3. Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.
4. Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.
Term Work/ Tutorial:

At least 08 assignments covering entire syllabus must be given during the ‘class wise tutorial’.
The assignments should be students’ centric and an attempt should be made to make assignments
more meaningful, interesting and innovative.

Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student with every
assignment graded from time to time. The grades will be converted to marks as per ‘credit and
grading system’ manual and should be added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading
and term work assessment should be done.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      10                 
      

Sub Subject Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credit Assigned


code Name Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC302 Electrical
Network
Analysis 4 - 1 4 - 1 5
and
Synthesis

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Electrical Network
ISC302 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
Analysis and Synthesis

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC302 Electrical Network Analysis and Synthesis 5

Course Objectives • To introduce the concept of circuit elements lumped circuits, circuit laws and
reduction.
• To study the concept of coupled circuits.
• To study the transient response of series and parallel A.C. circuits.
• To study the application of Laplace transforms to circuit analysis.
• To study two port model of circuit and circuit elements.
• To introduce the concept of network synthesis.

Course Outcomes • Analyze circuits with DC and AC sources.


• Find Thevenin and Norton equivalents of circuits.
• Analyze transient and steady-state responses response of passive
electrical networks.
• Analyze two port networks.
• Analyze the structure and function of network synthesis.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      11                 
      

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Networks Theorems 12
Analysis of networks with dependent sources, mesh analysis, nodal
analysis, source transformation technique, superposition theorem,
Thevenin’s theorem, Norton’s theorem, maximum power transfer
theorem, solution of networks with AC sources. Analysis of coupled
circuits (self inductance, mutual inductance, and dot convention)
2 Graph Theory 06
Introductory definition – Graph of a network, trees, co-trees, loops.
Incidence matrix, loop matrix and cutest matrix. Network equilibrium
equations, Duality.
3 Time and Frequency response of circuits 12
Voltage/current relations for R, L, C and their equations in time domain.
Initial and final conditions, first and second order differential equations,
steady state and transient response. Analysis of transient and steady state
responses using Classical technique as well as by Laplace transforms.
Steady state response to step, ramp, impulse and sinusoidal input
functions.
4 Network Functions: poles and zeros 04
Network functions for one port and two port networks, Driving point and
transfer functions, ladder network, general network, poles and zeros of
network functions, restrictions on Pole and zero locations for driving
point functions and Transfer functions, time domain behavior from pole-
zero plot.
5 04
Two-Port parameters
Open circuit, Short circuit, transmission and hybrid parameters,
relationship between parameter sets, reciprocity and symmetry conditions,
parallel connections, parallel connection of two port networks.

6 Fundamentals of Network Synthesis. 10


Causality and stability, Hurwitz polynomials, positive real functions,
synthesis of one port networks with two kinds of elements. Properties and
synthesis of L-C, R-C, R-L driving point impedances, synthesis of R-L-C
functions.
Properties of transfer functions, zeros of transmission, synthesis of Y21
and Z21 with a 1-Ohm termination, synthesis of constant – resistance
networks.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      12                 
      

List of suggested Tutorials/Simulations:


1. Examples indicating concept of super loop and super node.
2. Examples of indicating the application of thevenin’s and Norton’s theorem in
presence of dependent sources.
3. The incidence, Cut-set, Tieset, F-Cutest and F-Tie-Set Matrices should be written for
given graph.
4. Examples on evaluating the transient and steady-state conditions for a R-L-C series
or parallel connections for different values of resistance. The concept of overdamped,
critically damped, underdamped, oscillatory and unbounded response should become
clear from this problems.
5. Examples on evaluating the transient and steady-state conditions for a R-L, R-C circuits
for DC conditions.
6. Evaluating the above examples using Laplace Transform.
7. Examples on Hurwitz Polynomial. Necessary and sufficient condition for Positive real
function.
8. Examples on realization of R-L, R-C, L-C functions.
9. Examples on synthesis of R-L-C function.
10. Examples on the synthesis of Y21 and Z21 with a 1 ohm termination.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of
4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum three simulations and four tutorials from the above list.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Tutorials) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      13                 
      

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Kuo Franklin F., Network analysis and synthesis, 1st ed., Wiley International, 1962.
2. Van Valkenburg M.E., Network analysis, 3rd ed., Eastern Economy Edition, 1983.

Reference Books:
1. Roy Chaudhary D., Network and systems, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1991.
2. Hayt William, Kemmerly Jr.Jack E., Engineering circuit Analysis, 6th ed., Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2002.
3. Edminister Joseph A., Nahvi Mohmood, Electric Circuits, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw Hill
New Delhi 1999.
4. Shyammohan Sudhakar, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, 13th reprint,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2000
5. Bruce Carsion A., Circuits, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, 2000.
6. Dav Artice M., Linear Circuits Analysis, PWS Publishing Company, 1998.
7. Alexander Charlesk, Mathew N.O., Sadlku, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, McGraw
Hill, 2000.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      14                 
      

Sub Subject Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


code Name Theory Pract. Tut. Theory TW/Pract. Tut. Total
ISC303 Analog
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Electronics

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
ISC303 Analog Electronics 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC303 Analog Electronics 5


Course Objectives • To familiarize the student with basic electronic devices and circuits.
• To provide understanding of operation of diodes, bipolar and MOS
transistors, DC biasing circuits, Transistors as switching device,
Operational amplifier circuits, Power circuits and systems.

Course Outcomes • Students will be able to analyze, simulate, and design amplifiers
using BJT and MOSFETs.
• Students will be able to design various circuits using operational
amplifiers. Students will be able to do analysis of biasing techniques,
frequency response, feedback, stability, noise, and nonlinearities
associated with various devices and circuits.

Module Topics Hrs.


1 PN Junction diode small signal model, Zener diode and its applications, p-n
junction under forward bias and reverse bias conditions, p-n junction 04
breakdown region, Rectifier Circuits, Clipping and Clamping circuits
2 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)
• Physical structure and operation modes
• Active region operation of transistor 10
• D.C. analysis of transistor circuits
• Transistor as an amplifier

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      15                 
      

• Biasing the BJT: Different type of biasing circuit and their analysis. Bias
stability, Thermistor compensation, thermal runaway.
• Basic BJT amplifier configuration: common emitter, common base and
common collector amplifiers
• Transistor as a switch: cut-off and saturation modes
• High frequency model of BJT amplifier
3 Field Effect Transistor (FET)
• Junction FET its working and VI characteristic
Enhancement-type MOSFET: structure and physical operation, current-
voltage
characteristics
• Depletion-type MOSFET
• D.C. operation of JFET and MOSFET circuits 10
• JFET and MOSFET as an amplifier
• Biasing in JFET and MOSFET amplifiers
• Basic JFET and MOSFET amplifier configuration: common source,
common gate and common drain types
• High frequency model of FET, Low and High frequency response of
common source amplifier.
4 Operation Amplifier (Op-amps) and Oscillators
Amplifiers with feedback .Gain and BW considerations.
• Ideal Op-amp
• Differential amplifier: differential and common mode gains, common 06
mode rejection ratio (CMRR)
Oscillators: Introduction, Condition for Oscillation, RC phase shift,
Weinbridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal controlled oscillator.
5 Applications of Op-amp
• Practical op-amp circuits: inverting amplifier, non -inverting amplifier,
weighted Summation circuit, integrator, differentiator
• Large signal operation of op-amps
10
• Other applications of op-amps: instrumentation amplifier, active filters,
controlled sources, logarithmic amplifiers, waveform generators, Schmitt
triggers, comparators

6 Power Circuits and Systems


• Class A large signal amplifiers, Harmonic distortion
• Transformer coupled audio power amplifier
• Class B amplifier
8
• Class AB operation
• Power BJTs
• Regulated power supplies
• Series voltage regulator

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      16                 
      

List of Laboratory Experiments:

1. Study of input / output characteristics of BJT- CB, CE, and CC Configuration.


2. Study of input and transfer characteristics of FET.
3. BJT amplifier frequency response.
4. FET amplifier frequency response.
5. Measurement of operational amplifier parameters.
6. Clipper and Clamper circuits using Opamp.
7. Precision rectifiers using Opamp.
8. Adder and Subtrator using Opamp.
9. Wein bridge oscillator using Opamp.
10. RC phase shift oscillator using Opamp.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of
4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      17                 
      

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Books Recommended:
1. J. Millman and C. C. Halkias, Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital Circuits and
Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 1988.
2. Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Eighth
edition, PHI publishers, 2004.
4. J. Millman and Taub, Pulse and Digital Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. Ramakant A. Gaikwad, Op-amp and Integrated circuits, Fourth edition, PHI Publication,
2002.
6. Sergio Franco, Design with Op-amp and Analog Integrated circuits, Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, New Delhi.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      18                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC304 Digital Electronics 4 2 - 4 1 - 5

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral.
Avg. Exam
1 2
ISC304 Digital Electronics 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Digital Electronics 5
ISC304
Course Objectives • To teach principles of digital electronics.

• To teach topics including Boolean algebra, basic gates, logic circuits,


flip-flops, registers, arithmetic circuits, counters, interfacing with
analog devices, and computer memory

Course Outcomes • Students will be able to represent numerical values in various


number systems and perform number conversions between different
number systems.
• Students will demonstrate the knowledge of:
o operation of logic gates (AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR,
XNOR) using IEEE/ANSI standard symbols
o Boolean algebra including algebraic
manipulation/simplification, and application of
DeMorgan’s theorems
o Karnaugh map reduction method.
• Students will demonstrate the knowledge of operation of basic types
of flip-flops, registers, counters, decoders, encoders, multiplexers,
and de-multiplexers.
• Students will be able to analyze and design digital combinational
circuits including arithmetic circuits (half adder, full adder,
multiplier).
• Students will be able to analyze sequential digital circuits.
Students will demonstrate knowledge of the nomenclature and
technology in the area of memory devices: ROM, RAM, PROM,

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      19                 
      

PLD, FPGAs, etc.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Introduction to number systems 08


Number systems, binary, octal, hexadecimal and others. Conversion from
one system to another. Arithmetic, binary BCD and hexadecimal.
Binary codes
Weighted, reflective, sequential, gray, error detecting codes, odd, even
parity, hamming codes, ASCII, EBCDIC codes, converting binary to gray
and gray to binary and XS3.

2 Boolean Algebra and combinational Circuits 12


AND, OR, NOT, XOR, XNOR, operations NAND, NOR use of universal
gates for performing different operations. Laws of Boolean Algebra, De-
Morgan's theorems. Relating a truth table to a Boolean expression. Multi
level circuit.
Combinational Circuits
K-Maps and their use in simplifying Boolean expressions, minterm, maxterm
SOP and POS implementation. Implementing a logic function using
universal gates. Variable entered maps for five and six variable functions
3 Combination Logic Circuit Design 04
Designing code converter circuits e.g. binary to gray, BCD to seven segment
parity generator. Binary arithmetic circuits:- Adders, subtractors (half and
full), BCD adder-subtractor, carry look head adder, serial adder, multiplier
magnitude comparator, arithmetic logic units.
4 Use of Multiplexers in logic design 04
Multiplexer, deMultiplexers, decoders, encoders, designing using
multiplexer, demultiplexers, decoders. Ics of MUX, DEMUX, Decoders.
Hazards in combinational circuits.
5 Sequential Logic Circuits 16
Comparison of combinational and sequential circuits, , flip-flops, SR, T, D,
JK. converting one flip-flop into another, use of debounce switch, counters
modulus of a counter, ripple counters, up/down counter, designing sequential
counters using gate IC and counter by drawing state transition diagram and
state transition table. Ring counter, Johnson counter, twisted ring counter,
pseudo random number generator, unused states and locked conditions.
Registers: Serial input serial output, serial input parallel output, left shift,
right shift register, sequence generators.
Memories: RAM, ROM the basic cell IC bipolar, CMOS, RAM dynamic
RAM cell. Magnetic core NVRAM, bubble memory, CCD, PAL, PLA.
Introduction to PLD’s.
6 Logic Families: 04
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      20                 
      

Basics of digital integrated circuits, basic operational characteristics and


parameters. TTL, schottky clamped TTL, tri-state gate ECL, IIL, MOS
devices CMOS comparison of logic families. PMOS, NMOS and E2CMOS.
Introduction to FPGA.

List of Laboratory Experiments:

1. Implementing study of Gates and Logic Operations like, NOT, AND , OR, NR, XOR and
XNOR using (i)all NAND Gates (ii)all NOR Gates.
2. Implementing a binary to gray, gray to binary or binary to XS3 code converter using gate
ICs.
3. Simplifying 3, 4 variable logic functions and implementing them using gate ICs
AND/OR, OR/AND, ALL NAND and ALL NOR.
4. Implementation of Half and Full Adder Circuit.
5. Study of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer using ICs.
6. Constructing flip flops like SR, D, JK and T using all NAND gates and a de-bounce
switch.
7. Designing a mod N counter where N<14 using JK F/F and D F/F.
8. Design a ripple counter/or a two bit comparator using gate ICs.
9. Building a ring counter and a twisted ring counter using D f/f ICs.
10. Any one of the following:
i. Full Adder using Gates and using Decoder or a multiplexer.
ii. Using a counter ICs like 7490 or 7492 or 7493 as a BCD counter.
iii. Using a shift register as a sequence generator.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of
4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      21                 
      

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. Jain R.P., Modern Digital Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.


2. Malvino Leach, Digital Principles and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.

Reference Books:

1. Floyd Thomas L., Digital Fundamentals, 3rd ed., Belland Howell Company-1993.
2. Morris Mano M., Digital Design, Prentice Hall International-1984.
3. Almaini A.E., Electronic Logic Systems, 2nd ed., PHI-1986.
4. Malvino, Digital Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
5. Tocci, Digital Systems, PHI, 2000.
6. Dr. Jog Nandini K., Logic Circuits, 2nd ed., Nandu Publishers and printers Pvt, Ltd, 1998.
7. Floyd and Jain, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      22                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC305 Transducers-I 4 2 - 4 1 - 5

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
ISC305 Transducers-I 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Transducers-I 5
ISC305
Course Objectives • To make students understand the Identification, classification,
construction, working principle and application of various
transducers used for Displacement measurement, Temperature
measurement, Level measurement,and Miscellaneous measurement.

Course Outcomes The students will be able to

• Identify various sensors, Transducers and their brief Performance


specifications.

• Understand principle of working of various transducers used to


measure Temperature, Displacement, Level, and various
miscellaneous other sensors.

• Make comparative study of various transducers.

• Understand applications of various transducers in industry.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Metrology 06
What is Metrology, Need of Inspection, Physical measurement, Measuring
Instruments, Accuracy and Cost, Magnification, Selection of Instruments,
Classification of Methods of Measurement, Measurement Problems,

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      23                 
      

Objectives of Metrology, Standardization and Standardizing organization,


Role of National Physical Laboratory in Metrology, Introduction to limit
fits and gauges.
2 Instrumentation System 07
Units and standards of measurement, Introduction, block diagram,
functional elements of measurement system, static and dynamic
characteristics or performance characteristics of transducer, Measurement
and calibration systems- Requirement. Error: definition, classification,
statistical analysis of errors, Remedies for Errors.
Sensor and Transducer : Definition, classification (active, passive,
primary, secondary, mechanical, electrical, analog, digital), selection
criteria, sources of error for parameter under measurement, transducer
specifications, test condition and operating conditions.

3 Displacement 10
a) Resistance potentiometer: (linear and logarithmic), piezo-resistive
effect, ultrasonic transducer. LVDT, RVDT (transfer function, linearity,
sensitivity, source frequency dependence, phase null, and signal
conditioning). Selection and properties of materials for LVDT, and general
electromagnetic sensors.
b) Capacitance type transducers: with applications, materials for
capacitive, ultrasonic and elastic transducers.
c) Digital transducer: translational and rotary encoders (absolute
position and incremental position encoders), Optical and magnetic pickups.
d) Pneumatic transducer: flapper- nozzle transducer.
e) Comparative study for Displacement Transducers.
4 Temperature transducers: 12
Modes of heat transfer, laws of conduction, convection and radiation,
Temperature scales, classification of Temperature Sensors, Overview of
Temperature Sensor Material.
a)Thermometers: Classification of Thermometers, Construction and
working of glass thermometers, liquid expansion thermometer, gas
thermometer (filled system thermometer), bimetallic thermometer, solid state
temperature sensor, Specifications of Thermometers.
b)Resistance temperature detector (RTD):Principle, types,
Configurations, construction and working of RTD, Material for RTD, Signal
Measurement techniques for RTD,Comparative Response curves for RTD, 2
wire,3wire and 4 wire RTD Element, Lead wire Compensation in RTD ,self
heating effect, Specifications, advantages, disadvantages and applications of
RTD.
c) Thermistors: Principle, types (NTC and PTC), characteristics,
Construction and working of Thermistor, Materials, specifications of
Thermistor, applications.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      24                 
      

d) Thermocouples: Principle, thermoelectric effect, See beck effect, Peltier


effect, laws of thermocouple, types of thermocouple with characteristic
curve, thermocouple table, Sensitivity, constructional Features of
Thermocouples., Thermo couple specifications, electrical noise and noise
reduction techniques, cold junction Compensation method, thermopile,
thermocouple emf measurement method, Thermo well Material of
construction and its specifications.
e) Pyrometers: Principle, Construction and working of Radiation and
optical pyrometers and its Applications.
f) Comparative study for Temperature Transducers.
5 Level Transducers 08
Need for Level Measurement, Classification of Level Measurement
Techniques. Construction and working of Dipstick, displacer, float system,
bubbler, capacitive devices for level measurement, ultrasonic level gauge,
DP cell, load cell, vibrating type, microwave, radar, radioactive type level
gauges, LASER type transducers, fiber optic level sensors, solid level
detectors, Intelligent level measuring instruments.
Comparative study for Level Transducers.

6 Miscellaneous Transducers 05
Transducers for Position, speed, acceleration, vibration, sound, humidity,
and moisture measurement.

List of Experiments:
1. Study Basic Measurements and Measuring Instruments.
2. Study Temperature Measurement using various Thermo meters.
3. Study and plot characteristics of RTD.
4. Study and plot characteristics of various Thermocouples.
5. Study and plot characteristics of Thermistors.
6. Study Temperature Measurement with and without Thermo well.
7. Study Liquid Level Measurement using DP Cell.
8. Study Liquid Level Measurement using Capacitance Type Level Sensor.
9. Study Liquid Level Measurement using Tubular Level Gauge and Ultrasonic Level Sensor.
10. Study Displacement Transducer using LVDT.
11. Study and Plot Response curve for Flapper Nozzle system.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      25                 
      

3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of
4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. B.C Nakra, K.K. Cahudhary, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata
Mc Graw Hill.
2. Sawney A.K., Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation,
Dhanpatrai And Co.

Reference Books:

1. Doeblin E.D., Measurement system, Tata Mc Graw Hill., 4th ed, 2003.
2. Liptak B.G., Process measurement and analysis.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      26                 
      

3. Neubert Hermann K. P., Instrument Transducer, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, New
Delhi, 2003.
4. Johnson Curtis D., Process Control Instrumentation Technology, 8th ed., 2005
5. Jain R.K., Engineering Metrology, Khana Publishers.
6. Rangan, Mani, Sharma. Instrumentation Systems and Devices, 2nd ed., Tata Mc Graw
Hill.
7. S.P. Sukhatme, Heat Transfer, 3rd edition, University Press.
8. B.E. Jones, Instrument Technology.
9. Cheatle Keith R., Fundamentals of Test Measurement Instrument Instrumentation, ISA
Publication.
10. Alan S Morris ; Measurement and Instrumentation Principles; 3rd Edition
11. D. V. S. Murty, ‘Transducers and Instrumentation’, PHI, New Delhi, 2003.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      27                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC306 Object oriented
programming
4* - - 2 - 2
and
methodology
*Out of four hours, 2 hours theory shall be taught to entire class followed by 2 hrs. practical in
batches.

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Object oriented
ISC306 programming and - 25 50 - 75
- -  -
methodology

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC306 Object oriented programming and methodology 2


Course Objectives • To understand the concept of Object Oriented Programming
• To help student to understand use of programming language such as
JAVA to resolve problems.
• To impart problems understanding, analyzing skills in order to
formulate Algorithms.
• To provide knowledge about JAVA fundamentals: data types,
variables, keywords and control structures.
• To understand methods, arrays, inheritance, Interface, package and
multithreading and concept of Applet.

Course Outcomes • Students will be able to code a program using JAVA constructs.
• Given an algorithm a student will be able to formulate a program
that correctly implements the algorithm.
• Students will be able to generate different patterns and flows using
control structures and use recursion in their programs.
• Students will be able to use thread methods, thread exceptions and
thread priority.
• Students will implement method overloading in their code.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      28                 
      

• Students will be able to demonstrate reusability with the help of


inheritance.
• Students will be able to make more efficient programs.

Module Unit Topic Hrs.


No. No.

1 Fundamental concepts of object oriented programming 4


1.1 Overview of programming
1.2 Introduction to the principles of object-oriented programming: classes,
objects, messages, abstraction, encapsulation, inheritance,
polymorphism, exception handling, and object-oriented containers
1.3 Differences and similarity between C++ and JAVA
2 Fundamental of Java programming 4
2.1 Features of Java
2.2 JDK Environment & tools
2.3 Structure of Java program
2.4 Keywords , data types, variables, operators, expressions
2.5 Decision making, looping, type casting
2.6 Input output using scanner class
3 Classes and objects 6
3.1 Creating classes and objects
3.2 Memory allocation for objects
3.3 Passing parameters to Methods
3.4 Returning parameters
3.5 Method overloading
3.6 Constructor and finalize ( )
3.7 Arrays: Creating an array
3.8 Types of array : One dimensional arrays ,Two Dimensional array,
string
4 Inheritance, interface and package 6

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      29                 
      

4.1 Types of inheritance: Single, multilevel, hierarchical


4.2 Method overriding, super keyword, final keyword, abstract class
4.3 Interface
4.4 Packages
5 Multithreading 4
5.1 Life cycle of thread
5.2 Methods
5.3 Priority in multithreading
6 Applet 2
6.1 Applet life cycle
6.2 Creating applet
6.3 Applet tag
Total 26

Text Books:

1. Rajkumar Buyya, “Object-oriented programming with JAVA”, Mcgraw Hill


2. E Balgurusamy, “Programming with JAVA”, Tata McGraw Hill

Reference Books:
1. Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference JAVA”, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Barry Holmes and Daniel T. Joyce, “Object Oriented Programming with Java”, Jones &
Bartlett Learning

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      30                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC401 Applied
4 - 1 4 - 1 5
Mathematics-IV

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
ISC401 Applied Mathematics-
20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
IV

Course pre-requisite:
FE C 101 : Applied Mathematics I
FE C 201 : Applied Mathematics II
SE S 301 : Applied Mathematics III
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
ISC401 Applied Mathematics-IV 5

Course Objectives This course will present the method of calculus of variations, basic
concepts of probability, matrix theory, concept of ROC and residue
theory with applications.

• To provide students with a sound foundation in Mathematics and


prepare them for graduate studies in Instrumentation Engineering
• To provide students with mathematics fundamental necessary to
formulate, solve and analyze engineering problems.
• To provide opportunity for students to work as part of teams on multi
disciplinary projects.

Course Outcomes • Students will able to apply method of calculus of variations to


specific systems, demonstrate ability to manipulate matrices and
compute eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Identify and classify zeros,
singular points, residues and their applications.
• Students will demonstrate an ability to identify formulate and solve
Instrumentation Engineering related problem using Applied
Mathematics.
• Students will show the understanding of impact of engineering

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      31                 
      

mathematics on Instrumentation Engineering.


• Students who can participate and succeed in competitive exams
like GATE, GRE.

Module Unit Topics Hrs.


No. No.

1. 0 Calculus of variation 10

1.1 Euler Langrange equation, solution of Euler’s Langrange equation (only


results for different cases for function) independent of a variable,
independent of another variable, independent of differentiation of a variable
and independent of both variables
1.2 Isoperimetric problems, several dependent variables

1.3 Functions involving higher order derivatives: Rayleigh-Ritz method

2.0 Linear algebra: vector spaces 12

2.1 Vectors in n-dimensional vector space: Properties, dot product, cross


product, norm and distance properties in n-dimensional vector space.

2.2 Metric spaces, vector spaces over real field, properties of vector spaces
over real field, subspaces.

2.3 Norms and normed vector spaces

2.4 Inner products and inner product spaces

2.5 The Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, orthogonal Subspaces, Gram-Schmidt


process

3.0 Linear Algebra: Matrix Theory 15

3.1 Characteristic equation, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, properties of


Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors

3.2 Cayley-Hamilton theorem, examples based on verification of Cayley-


Hamilton theorem

3.3 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalisation of matrix

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      32                 
      

3.4 Functions of square matrix, derogatory and non-derogatory matrices

3.5 Quadratic forms over real field, reduction of quadratic form to a


diagonal canonical form, rank, index, signature of quadratic form,
Sylvester’s law of inertia, value-class of a quadratic form of definite,
semi- definite and indefinite

3.6 Singular Value Decomposition

4.0 Complex variables: Integration 15

4.1 Complex Integration: Line Integral, Cauchy’s Integral theorem for simply
connected regions, Cauchy’s Integral formula

4.2 Taylor’s and Laurent’s series

4.3 Zeros, singularities, poles of f(z), residues, Cauchy’s Residue theorem

4.4 Applications of Residue theorem to evaluate real Integrals of different


types

Total 52

Text books:

1) A Text Book of Applied Mathematics Vol. I & II by P.N.Wartilar & J.N.Wartikar, Pune,

Vidyarthi Griha Prakashan., Pune

2) Mathematical Methods in science and Engineering, A Datta (2012)

3) Higher Engg. Mathematics by Dr. B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publication

Reference Books:

1) Todd K.Moon and Wynn C. Stirling, Mathematical Methods and algorithms for Signal
Processing, Pearson Education.
2) Kreyszig E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th edition, John Wiley, 2006.
3) Linear Algebra- Hoffman & Kunze (Indian editions) 2002
4) Linear Algebra- Anton & Torres (2012) 9th Indian Edition.
5) Complex Analysis – Schaum Series.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      33                 
      

Internal Assessment (IA):

Two tests must be conducted which should cover at least 80% of syllabus. The average marks of
both the tests will be considered for final Internal Assessment.

End Semester Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.


2. The students need to solve total 4 questions.
3: Question No.1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus.
4: Remaining question (Q.2 to Q.6) will be selected from all the modules.

Term Work/Tutorial:

At least 08 assignments covering entire syllabus must be given during the Class Wise Tutorial.
The assignments should be students’ centric and an attempt should be made to make assignments
more meaningful, interesting and innovative.

Term work assessment must be based on the overall performance of the student with every
assignment graded from time to time. The grades will be converted to marks as per Credit and
Grading System manual and should be added and averaged. Based on above scheme grading
and term work assessment should be done.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      34                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC402 Feedback Control
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
System

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
ISC402 Feedback Control
20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
System

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


ISC402 Feedback Control System 5
Course Objectives • To familiarize students with concepts of control systems and
mathematical modeling of the System.
• To understand the concept of transient and steady-state response
analysis for control systems and to assess the stability of control
systems through the root-locus method and the frequency-response
method.

Course Outcomes • Students will able to represent the mathematical model of a system
and determine the response of different order systems.
• Students will have the ability to analyse the stability of the system.

Module Topics Hrs.


1 Introduction 02
Definition of control system and related terms, open loop and closed loop
system, examples. Development of automatic control systems, classification
of control system, examples
2 Mathematical Models of Physical Systems 08
Definition of physical systems, principle of superposition and homogeneity,
linear/non-linear, time variant/time invariant systems. Types of dynamic
model, linear elements of electrical and mechanical systems, differential
equations of physical systems-mechanical systems, electrical systems,
thermal systems, fluid systems, pneumatic systems. Analogous systems.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      35                 
      

3 Transfer Function and Feedback Characteristics 14


Definition of transfer function, sinusoidal transfer function,
transfer functions of physical systems, block diagram algebra, reduction
rules, signal flow graphs-definition, construction, properties, and Mason's
gain formula ,sensitivity of closed loop and open loop system, effect of
feedback, effect of disturbances signals, regenerative feedback with
examples
4 Time Response Analysis 08
Standard test signals, pulse and impulse function, step function, ramp
function, parabolic function, sinusoidal function, dynamic response, time
response of first order system, time response of second order system,
specifications, steady - state error, system types and error constants, effect of
adding zeros and poles to a system, design specifications of second order
system- desired close loop pole location and the dominant condition.
5 Stability Analysis and Root Locus 08
Concept of stability, definitions, bounded input-bounded
output stability, relative stability, necessary and sufficient
conditions for stability, Routh stability criterion, relative
stability analysis, root locus technique, applications, concept, construction of
root loci, root loci of different systems.
6 Frequency Response and Stability Analysis 08
Correlation between time and frequency response, polar plots, Bode plots,
log magnitude versus phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, frequency
response specifications, stability analysis using-bode, polar, log-magnitude
versus phase plots, definitions and significance of gain margin and phase
margin, sensitivity analysis in frequency domain

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. To study time response of Type 0, 1, 2 systems.
2. To study the effect of time constant on performance of 1st order system.
3. To study the effect of damping factor on the performance of second order system.
4. To study time response of Second order under damped systems. Calculate time response
specifications.
5. To study the frequency response of First and Second order systems.
6. Atleast four experiments should be performed using simulation software like MATH
CAD/MATLAB/SCILAB/OCTAVE or equivalent.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      36                 
      

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature


5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.
Text Books:

1. Nagrath I. G., Gopal M., “Control System Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd.
Publishers 2000.
2. Kuo Benjamin C., “Automatic Control Systems”, 6th ed., Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
1993.

Reference Books:

1. Gopal M., “Control Systems Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
New Delhi, 1998.
2. Nise Norman S., “Control Systems Engineering”, 3rd ed., John Wiley and Sons, Inc. -2000.
3. Lewis Paul H., Chang Yang, “Basic Control Systems Engineering”, Prentice Hall
International, Inc. 1997.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      37                 
      

4. Raymond T. Stefani, Bahram Shahian, late Clement J. Savant and late Gene H. Hostetter,
“Design of Feedback Control Systems”, 4th ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2001.
5. Dhanesh N. Manik, “Control System”, Cengage Lerning India, 1st edition, 2012.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      38                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC403 Electrical
Technology
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
and Instruments

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term Tota
code and Oral
(out of 20) sem Work l
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
ISC403 Electrical Technology
20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
and Instruments

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC403 Electrical Network Analysis and Synthesis 5

Course Objectives • To introduce the basic concept of machines and measuring instruments
• To study the construction, types, characteristics, starting methods, speed
control methods and applications of DC and AC machines.
• To study the basic analog instruments as well as sophisticated digital
instruments like digital voltmeters.

Course Outcomes • The students get well versed with construction, characteristics, and
applications of DC machines as well as AC machines.
• Students also get thorough knowledge of construction, working
principle, limitations and applications of Analog and Digital
Instruments.
.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 D.C. Machines 12
Constructional details, types (shunt, series and compound), generator action.
emf equation, motoring action, significance of back emf, torque and speed
equations, torque-armature current, speed-armature current and torque-speed
characteristics of different types of motors, speed control, starter,
applications. General specifications of D.C. Machine and their significance.
2 Induction Motor 12
Rotating magnetic field, construction and principle of operation, slip, rotor
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      39                 
      

frequency, torque-slip characteristic, relationship between slip and rotor


copper loss, speed control, starting methods, motor ratings. General
specifications of induction motor and their significance.
3 Fractional Horse Power Motors
Construction and principle of operation of single phase induction motortypes 08
of single phase induction motor (resistance split phase, capacitance split
phase) and their applications. Shaded pole induction motor. Introduction to
Variable frequency drives and its application.
4 Analog Meters 04
Construction and working principle of: ammeters, voltmeters, ohmmeters,
power factor meter, energy meter, Q meters, D’Arsonaval galvanometers-
PMMC and PMMI instruments.
Shunts and multipliers-Measurement of phase and frequency, analog
multimeters.
5 Measurement of R, L, C 04
Measurement of medium, low and high resistance, megger.
A.C. and D.C. potentiometers: A.C. Bridges, measurement of self and mutual
inductances. Measurement of capacitance. Derivations and numericals related
to all bridges.
6 Electronic Measuring Instruments 08
Electronic voltmeters, Principle of A/D and D/A converters and their types,
DVM and DMM, automation in voltmeters (ranging, zeroing, polarity
indication).

List of Laboratory Experiments:

1. Speed control of DC shunt motor by armature voltage and flux control method.
2. Load test on DC shunt motor.
3. Load test on DC series motor.
4. Speed control of 3 phase slip ring induction motor by adding the external resistance in the
rotor circuit.
5. Starting of induction motor by D.O.L., autotransformer, star/delta and rotor resistance starter.
6. Study of different types of fractional horse power motors.
7. Study of D.C. machine starter.
8. Study of Multi-meterand CRO: front panel controls and specifications.
9. Introduction, identification and testing of various components like resistors, capacitors,
inductor, transistor, diode, various ICs.
10. Measurement of medium value resistance using bridge.
11. Measurement of small value resistance using bridge.
12. Measurement of Inductance by using bridge.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      40                 
      

13. Study of D.C. Potentiometer.


14. Study of Megger.
15. Measurement of Capacitance using A.C. Bridges.
16. Measurement of phase and frequency using frequency meters and Synchroscope.
17. Applications of CRO (Measurements of phase and frequency and component testing).
18. Study of DVM.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs/ journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      41                 
      

End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Sawhney A. K., Electrical and Electronics Measurement and Instrumentation, Dhanpat
Rai and Co.Pvt Ltd.
2. Nagrath I. J., Kothari D. P., Electrical Machines, 2nd ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
1997.

Reference Books:
1. Guru Bhag S., Hiziroglu Huseyin R., Electric Machinery and Transformers, 3rd ed., Oxford
University Press, New Delhi 2007.
2. Say M. G., The performance and Design of Alternating Current Machines, 3rd ed., CBS
Publisher and Distributor, Delhi, 1983.
3. Taylor Openshaw, FHP Motors, Addison Wesley 1976.
4. Kalsi H. S., Electronics Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1997.
5. Khandpur R. S., Preventive Maintenance and Troubleshooting, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
1997.
6. Cooper W.D., Helfrick A.D., Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques,
Prentice Hall of India Limited, New Delhi.
7. Rangan C. S., Sharma G. R., Mani V. S., Instrumentation Devices and Systems, 2nd ed., Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1997.
8. Rathore-Narosa T. S., Digital Measurement Techniques.
9. Oliver and Cage, Modern Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation, MGH.
10. Bouwens A. J., Digital Instrumentation, MGH.
11. Technical Manuals of DSO: APLAB, Scientific, HP etc.
12. Technical Manuals for Virtual CRO.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      42                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC404 Communication
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
System

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Avg oral
Test 1 Test 2 Exam
.
ISC404 Communication
20 20 20 80 25 - - 125
System

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC404 Communication System 5

Course Objectives • To teach students about the basic principles underlying the operation
and design of a communication system.
• To introduce the students to analog and digital communication as well
as to telemetry principle
• To introduce the students to network model of communication in brief.

Course Outcomes • Students will be able to understand the basic operating principles of
current communication systems or standards.
• Students will be equipped with the ability to analyze and design a
communication system.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Introduction to communication system: Elements of a communication 08


system, noise in communication systems, Amplitude Modulation:
Introduction, time and frequency domain analysis, power relations, basic
requirements and description of various modulators, comparison of DSB,
SSB, VSB, ISB modulation and detection.
2 Angle Modulation: Introduction to frequency modulation, phase 08
modulation, spectrum or FM, effect of noise in FM, generation of FM and
detection.
3 Pulse and Digital Modulation: pulse modulation methods, pulse amplitude 08
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      43                 
      

(PAM) pulse position (PPM), pulse duration/width (PWM) modulation


methods for digital signals over analogue: amplitude shift keying (ASK),
frequency shift keying (FSK), and phase shift keying (PSK) Quaternary
Phase Shift Keying (QPSK).
4 Pulse and Digital Modulation II: Quaternary Amplitude Modulation 08
(QAM), DPSK, M-ary PSK, M-ary FSK, OQPSK, MSK, Modulation,
demodulation, signal space diagram, spectrum, bandwidth efficiency, power
efficiency, probability of error, applications, Digital Pulse Code Modulation,
Delta modulation; Adaptive Della modulation. Multiplexing techniques:
space division; frequency division; time division; wavelength division.
5 Telemetry: Methods of data transmission, general telemetry land line 08
telemetering voltage telemetry current telemetry different types force
balance impulse and position telemetry land line, Feedback telemetry
systems, FM telemetry systems PAM telemetry, PAM telemetry.
6 Introduction to Networks: 08
OSI reference model, System Engineering approach, Evolution of Industrial
Control Process, Communication Interface-Serial and parallel,
Communication Modes-Simplex, Half Duplex, Duplex ,Synchronization and
timing.Protocols-Rs232 interface, PC-Parallel port interface, GPIB

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. To analyze the signals in frequency domain.
2. To analyze the AM generation and detection and calculate the modulation index.
3. To analyze the SSB generation and detection.
4. To observe the FM generation and detection and frequency deviation and modulation index of
FM.
5. To generate and detect phase modulation.
6. To analyze PAM generation and detection.
7. To analyze PWM generation and detection.
8. To analyze PPM generation and detection.
9. To analyze PAM generation and detection.
10. To analyze delta modulation and demodulation.
11. To observe time division multiplexing.
12. To observe frequency division multiplexing
13. To analyze FSK modulation.
14. To analyze PSK modulation.
15. Study of RS-232 protocol
16. Study of PC parallel port.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      44                 
      

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.


3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work ( programs/ journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.
Text Books:
1. Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, 2nd Edition, Thomson Learning. IlJ89.
2. Hayk in, Simon S., Communication Systems, John Wiley.

Reference Books:
1. Taub and Schilling, Principles 0/ Communication Engineering, 2nd Edition, 1993.
2. Bruce Carlson, Communication Systems, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1994.
3. Kennedy and Davis, Electronic Communication Systems. McGraw hill. 1985.
4. Lathi Ghagwandas Pannalal, Signals. Systems and Communications, John Wile\New
York, 2000.
5. Dennis Roddy and John Coolen, Electronic Communications, 3rd Edition. Prentice Hall
of India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1986.
6. A.K. Sawhney, A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation,
Dhanpat Rai and Co., 1997.
7. Perry A. Borden and W.J. Mayo, Telemetering Systems, Wells Reinhold publishing
Corporation, New York, 1959.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      45                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC405 Transducers-II 4 2 - 4 1 - 5

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Avg oral
Test 1 Test 2 Exam
.
ISC405 Transducers-II 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC405 Transducers-II 5
Course Objectives • To make students understand the construction, working principle and
application of various transducers used for flow measurement, strain
measurement, pressure and vacuum measurement, force, torque and
power measurement.
• To study electro-chemical sensors and transducers used for density and
viscosity measurement.
Course Outcomes The course would enable the students to:
• Understand principle of working of various transducers used to
measure flow, pressure, strain, force, power and torque etc.
• Make comparative study of various transducers.
• Understand applications of various transducers in industry.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Strain Measurement 06
Introduction, types of strain gauge, gauge factor calculation, materials for
strain gauge, resistance strain gauge bridges, temperature compensation and
applications of strain gauges.

2 Pressure Measurement 12
Pressure scales, units and relations, classification
a)Primary pressure sensors - elastic elements like bourdon tube,
diaphragm, bellows, properties and selection of elastic materials, Calibration
using dead weight tester.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      46                 
      

b) Electrical/Secondary Pressure Transducers: Capacitive, piezo-electric


and its material, variable reluctance, LVDT, strain gauge.
c) High Pressure Measurement: Bulk modulus cell, Bridgeman type,
capsule.
d) Differential pressure measurement: Force balance, motion balance, DP
Cell, semiconductor strain gauges.
e) Pressure measurement using manometer: U-tube types, well type,
inclined type, micro manometer
3 Vacuum Measurement 04
Units and relations, McLeod gauge, Pirani gauge, thermocouple gauge, hot
cathode ionization gauge, Knudsen gauge, Calibration using dead weight
tester
4 Flow Measurement 14
Introduction to fluid flow: properties of fluid, types of fluid, dimensionless
numbers, types of fluid flow, continuity equation, Bernoulli’s equation,
hydrostatic law, Pascal’s law, flow through pipes – major and minor losses,
flow measurement through open channel-weirs and notches. Materials used
for flow sensors, performance of materials, corrosion resistors, erosion,
effect of vapour pressure
Head Type: orifice, venturi, nozzle, pitot tube, annubar, characteristics of
head type flow meters.
Variable Area Type: Rotameter and its type.
Other flow meters: Turbine, electromagnetic, ultrasonic, positive
displacement, anemometers, mass flow meters, solid flow measurements.
5 Electro-chemical Sensors 05
Terminology, equations, units.
pH measurement-electrodes, measuring circuits, maintenance, temperature
compensation, calibration.
Conductivity measurement-probes and measuring circuits.
ORP(Oxidation Reduction Potential) Measurement.
6 Miscellaneous Measurement 07
Force Measurement: strain gauge, LVDT, piezoelectric.
Torque: Torsion bar, strain gauge.
Power: Dynamometer, instantaneous power measurement, alternator power
measurement.
Density Measurement – Displacement and float type densitometers,
Hydrometers, Radiation and Ultrasonic densitometers
Viscosity Measurement – Capillary tube viscometer, Efflux type viscometer,
Variable area viscometer

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      47                 
      

List of Laboratory Experiments:

1. Strain gauge characteristics and weight measurement.


2. Measurement of pressure using bellows, diaphragm, bourdon tube, manometer.
3. Test and calibration of pressure gauges using dead weight tester.
4. Measurement of flow using orifice/venturi tube/nozzle/pitot tube.
5. Measurement of flow using rotameter.
6. Measurement of flow using electromagnetic flow meter.
7. Study and characterization of pH meter.
8. Study and characterization of conductivity meter.
9. Humidity measurement.
10. Viscosity measurement.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of
4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical /oral Examination:


Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs/ journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      48                 
      

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions
to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum
80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. Nakra B.C., Chaudhary K.K., Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata Mc Graw
Hill.
2. Sawhney A.K., Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation, Dhanpatrai
And Co.

Reference Books:

1. Doeblin E.D., “Measurement system”, Tata Mc Graw Hill., 4th ed, 2003
2. Liptak B.G., “Instrument engineer’s handbook – Process measurement and analysis”.
3. Douglas M. Considine, “Process Instruments and controls”, Handbook, Mc Graw Hill.
4. Curtis Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8th ed, 2005.
5. Rangan, Mani, Sarma, “Instrumentation Systems and Devices”, 2nd ed., Tata Mc Graw
Hill.
6. Andrew Williams, “Applied Instrumentation in process industry”, Vol-I, Gulf publishing
company.
7. Bansal R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi publications.
8. David W. Spitzer, “Industrial Flow Measurement”, ISA Publication.

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      49                 
      

Sub Teaching Scheme(Hrs) Credit Assigned


Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC406 Application
Software - 4* - - 2 - 2
Practices

* Out of four hours, 2 hours theory shall be taught to entire class followed by 2 hrs. practical in
batches.
Examination Scheme
Theory(out of --)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of --) and Oral Total
sem Work
Avg oral
Test 1 Test 2 Exam
.
ISC406 Application Software
- - - - 25 25 - 50
Practices

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC406 Application Software Practices 2


Course Objectives • To study LabVIEW software for creating custom applications that
interact with real-world data or signals in fields of science and
engineering.
Course Outcomes • The course would enable the students to develop customized virtual
instruments and represent them in the required format with user
friendly graphical user interface in the field of Engineering.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 LabVIEW Programing: Components of virtual instrument, creating VI and 04


sub-VI, LabVIEW data types, debugging techniques.
2 Structures- case structure, sequence structures, formula nodes and mathscript 06
loops- shift registers and feedback node, Arrays and clusters.
3 Arrays and clusters, strings and file I/O 06
4 Plotting data -- graphs and charts, local and global variables, Express VI 04
5 Introduction to terms: Measurement system, sampling, calibration, 02
measurement hardware- configuration.
6 Data Acquisition cards, LabVIEW modules and toolsets, general 02
applications of LabVIEW.
 

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      50                 
      

List of Suggested Programs

1) To develop a VI to calculate speed, convert degree Celsius to degree Fahrenheit,


compute the given equations etc.
2) To develop a VI to calculate factorial of a given number, addition of first 10 numbers
etc. using loops
3) To develop a Sub VI to calculate average of given numbers, solve the given series etc.
4) Build a VI to plot circle in XY graph, generate and plot random numbers on chart,
different colors in an intensity graph etc with graph, chart properties and options.
5) To create VI student database, library database etc. using array and cluster functions.
6) To create VI to find roots of quadratic equation, user defied unit conversions etc using
case structure.
7) To create VI to simulate traffic light control, stirred tank heater etc. using Sequence
structure.
8) Develop a VI to storing all the points of simulated signal, storing all iterations from
experiment 2 etc. using File I/Os.
9) Applications of LabVIEW in analog electronics—simulation of RC circuit
characteristics, diode characteristics etc.
10) Applications of LabVIEW in digital electronics—half adder, full adder, binary to decimal
conversion etc.
11) Applications of LabVIEW in process —tank level/temperature control, alarm
annunciator, batch process control etc.
12) Applications of LabVIEW in control —simulate first and second order system response,
effect of damping factor etc,
13) Write a VI to compute Matrices calculations like transpose, rank, inverse, determinant,
eigen values etc.
14) Write a VI to carry out Signal analysis like spectral measurements, statistics, filtering,
curve fitting etc using express VIs.
15) To design VI for simulation of To create VI for controlling multiple parameters ( Sub
VI and main VI)
16) Measurement of AC/ DC voltage and current using DAQ cards.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum 12 programs out of which minimum 6 Programs from 1 to
6 and any 6 from the remaining list of suggested programs.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      51                 
      

Laboratory work (Programs) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (Journal/Test) : 10 Marks
Attendance : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Reference Books:

1. Robert Bishop, “Learning with LabVIEW TM 7 express”, Pearson Education, 2005.


2. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation”, PHI, 2010.
3. Gupta S, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited.
4. LabVIEW users manual.
5. National instruments Product catalog.
Website: www.ni.com

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012‐13      52                 
AC 7/6/201
Item No. – 4.30

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering
Instrumentation Engineering (Third Year – Sem. V & VI),
Revised course
(REV- 2012) from Academic Year 2014 -15,
Under
FACULTY OF TECHNOLOGY
(As per Semester Based Credit and Grading System)
From Dean’s Desk:

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of


quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner.
Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education. The
major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program
that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Technology of University of
Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome based education in
the process of curriculum development.

Faculty of Technology, University of Mumbai, in one of its meeting unanimously


resolved that, each Board of Studies shall prepare some Program Educational
Objectives (PEO’s) and give freedom to affiliated Institutes to add few (PEO’s) and
course objectives and course outcomes to be clearly defined for each course, so that
all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of
course to be taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. It was also
resolved that, maximum senior faculty from colleges and experts from industry to be
involved while revising the curriculum. I am happy to state that, each Board of
studies has adhered to the resolutions passed by Faculty of Technology, and
developed curriculum accordingly. In addition to outcome based education, semester
based credit and grading system is also introduced to ensure quality of engineering
education.

Semester based Credit and Grading system enables a much-required shift in focus
from teacher-centric to learner-centric education since the workload estimated is
based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on
continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. University of
Mumbai has taken a lead in implementing the system through its affiliated Institutes
and Faculty of Technology has devised a transparent credit assignment policy and
adopted ten points scale to grade learner’s performance. Credit assignment for courses
is based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be
taught in 12-13 weeks and remaining 3-2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest
lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus etc.

Credit and grading based system was implemented for First Year of Engineering from
the academic year 2012-2013. Subsequently this system will be carried forward for
Second Year Engineering in the academic year 2013-2014, for Third Year and Final
Year Engineering in the academic years 2014-2015 and 2015-2016 respectively.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande
Dean,
Faculty of Technology,
Member - Management Council, Senate, Academic Council
University of Mumbai, Mumbai

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 1


Preamble:
The overall technical education in our country is changing rapidly in manifolds. Now
it is very much challenging to maintain the quality of education with its rate of
expansion. To meet present requirement a systematic approach is necessary to build
the strong technical base with the quality. Accreditation will provide the quality
assurance in higher education and also to achieve recognition of the institution or
program meeting certain specified standards. The main focus of an accreditation
process is to measure the program outcomes, essentially a range of skills and
knowledge that a student will have at the time of graduation from the program that is
being accredited. Faculty of Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in
incorporating philosophy of outcome based education in the process of curriculum
development.

I, as Chairman, Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering of University of Mumbai,


happy to state here that, Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) were finalized for
undergraduate program in Electrical Engineering, more than twenty senior faculty
members from the different institutes affiliated to University of Mumbai were actively
participated in this process. Few PEOs were finalized for undergraduate program in
Electrical Engineering are listed below;

 To provide the overall strong technical foundation to formulate, solve and


analyse engineering problems during undergraduate program.
 To prepare students to demonstrate an ability to identify, formulate and solve
electrical based issues.
 To prepare students to demonstrate ability in the area of design, control,
analyse and interpret the electrical and electronics systems.
 To prepare students for successful career in industry, research and
development.
 To develop the ability among students for supervisory control and data
acquisition for power system application.
 To provide opportunity for students to handle the multidisciplinary projects.
 To create the awareness of the life-long learning and to introduce them to
professional ethics and codes of professional practice.

The affiliated institutes may include their own PEOs in addition to the above list to
support the philosophy of outcome based education, in addition to stated PEOs,
objectives and expected outcomes are also included in the curriculum. I know, this is
a small step taken to enhance and provide the quality education to the stake holders.

Chairman,
Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering,
University of Mumbai

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 2


Semester V

Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned


Subject
Subject Name Pract./ Pract./
Code Theory Theory Total
Tut. Tut.
ISC501 Signals and Systems 4 2 4 1 5
ISC502 Applications of
4 2 4 1 5
Microcontroller -I
ISC503 Control System Design 4 2 4 1 5
ISC504 Signal Conditioning
Circuit Design 4 2 4 1 5
ISC505 Control system
components 4 2 4 1 5
ISC506 Business
Communication and - 2*+2 - 2 2
Ethics
20 14 20 7 27

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Ter
Subject Internal Prac
Subject Name End Exam m
Code Assessment t./ Total
Sem Duration wor
Test Test Oral
Avg. exam (in Hrs) k
1 2
ISC501 Signals and Systems
20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125
ISC502 Applications of
Microcontroller -I 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
ISC503 Control System Design 20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125
ISC504 Signal Conditioning 03
20 20 20 80 25 50+ 175
Circuit Design
ISC505 Control system 03
20 20 20 80 25 25+ 150
components
ISC506 Business
Communication and - - - - - 50 - 50
Ethics
Total 100 400 -- 175 100 775
+ Includes both Practical and Oral examination,
* Theory for entire class to be conducted

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 3


Semester VI

Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned


Subject
Subject Name Pract./
Code Theory Theory Pract./ Tut. Total
Tut.
ISC601 Process Instrumentation
Systems 4 2 4 1 5

ISC602 Power Electronics and


4 2 4 1 5
Drives
ISC603 Digital Signal Processing 4 2 4 1 5
ISC604 Applications of
4 2 4 1 5
Microcontroller -II
ISC605 Industrial Data
3 2 3 1 4
Communication
ISC606 Analytical
3 2 3 1 4
Instrumentation
Total 22 12 22 6 28

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Ter
Subject Internal Prac
Subject Name End Exam m
Code Assessment t./ Total
Sem Duration wor
Test Test Oral
Avg. exam (in Hrs) k
1 2
ISC601 Process Instrumentation
Systems 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
ISC602 Power Electronics and
Drives 20 20 20 80 03 25 25* 150
ISC603 Digital Signal
20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
Processing
ISC604 Applications of
20 20 20 80 03 25 25* 150
Microcontroller -II
ISC605 Industrial Data
20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125
Communication
ISC606 Analytical
Instrumentation 20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125
Total 120 480 -- 150 100 850
* Includes both Practical and Oral examination

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 4


Subject Subject Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code Name (Hrs.)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
ISC501 Signals 4 2 -- 4 1 -- 5
and
Systems

Subject Subject Examination Scheme


Code Name Theory Marks Term Practical Oral Total
Internal assessment End Work & Oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg Sem.
Exam
ISC501 Signals 20 20 20 80 25 -- -- 125
and
Systems

Subject Subject Name Credits


Code

ISC501 Signals and System 5


Course  To introduce students to the idea of signal and system analysis and
Objectives characterization in time and frequency domain.
 To provide foundation of signal and system concepts to areas like
communication, control and comprehend applications of signal processing
in communication systems.
Course  Students will be able to understand significance of signals and systems in
Outcomes the time and frequency domains.
 Students will be able to interpret and analyze signal and report results.
 Students will be able to evaluate the time and frequency response of
continuous and discrete time, system which is useful in understanding
behavior of communication and control systems.

Module Topics Hours


1 Introduction:
Definition of signal, Singular Functions, Basic Operations on signal such
as: Addition, Multiplication, Time Scaling, Time Shifting, Folding, and
Amplitude Scaling.
10
Classification: C.T. D.T, Periodic, aperiodic, / non-periodic, Even/Odd,
Energy/ Power, causal and anticausal signals.
Classification of System: Static and dynamic, time invariant and time
variant, Linear and Non linear, Causal and Non causal stable and unstable
invertible and non invertible.
2 Linear Time Invariant System: 07
Linear differential equations, Impulse response Representation of signals
by a continuum of impulses.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 5


Convolution for continues time and discrete time (Linear and Circular)
Properties of LTI System.

3 Fourier Series
Orthogonal functions, definitions, Approximation, Co-efficient calculation 04
on the basis of min. Mean square error.
Representation of Fourier series in terms of trigonometric,
exponential, complex. Gibbs phenomenon.
4 Fourier Transform
Continuous and Discrete time Fourier transform Properties. Linearity, time 06
shifting, time reversal, frequency shifting, Scaling, Convolution in time
domain, diff. in time domain. Differentiation in freq. domain parsevals
relation. Relationship between Z, Laplace and Fourier transform.

5 Laplace Transform:
07
Definition ROC concept, Properties, Inverse LT Transient and steady state
response of LTI system. Stability & Causality of system.
6 Z-Transform:
14
Definition, Convergence, properties and inversion (PFE long division
Residue method) of Z-Transform. Concept of single and double sided Z-
Transform. Analysis of discrete time system using Z-Transform. Stability
and Causality.

List of Tutorials / Experiments:


1. Difference between continuous time and discrete time signals, classification,
problems on Signal classification.
2. Difference between continuous time and discrete time signals, classification,
problems on Systems classification.
3. Problems on Basic Operations on signals.
4. Singular functions, Impulse function and its approximation, I/O systems.
Difference equation formulation.
5. Problems on convolution Integral, convolution sum and correlation.
6. Problems on Laplace and its properties.
7. Concept of Z-Transform (Single and Double Sided), analysis, relation between
Laplace Transform and Z-Transform.
8. Fourier series representation, properties, problems on Fourier series and
Fourier Transform.
9. Fourier Transform, properties, problems on Fourier Transform.
10. Relation between Fourier and Laplace, Solutions to differential equations
Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 6


4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term work:
Term work consists of minimum eight tutorials. The distribution of the term work
shall be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignments) :10 marks


Laboratory work (Programs / Journal) :10 marks
Attendance (Practical and Theory) :05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term-work ensures the satisfactory


performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work.
Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Oppenhelm, Wilsky and Nawab, Signals and Systems, PHI / Pearson
Education, 2nd edition, 2002.
2. S. P. Xavier, Signals and Systems, 2nd Edition, S. Chand and Co., 1998.
3. J.B. Gurung, Signals and Systems, 1st Edition, PHI, 2009.

Reference Books:
1. Reddy and Prasad, Signals Processing, TMH, Vol. II, 1994.
2. Taylor, Principles of Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 1994.
3. Haykin, Simon S., Signals and Systems, John Wiley, New York, 1978.
4. Lathi B. P., Signals Processing and Linear Systems, Oxford University
Press,2003.
5. I. J. Nagrath, Signals and Systems, 1st Edition, TMH, 2000.
6. Douglas K. Lindner, Introduction to Signals and Systems, TMH, 1999.
7. Rodger E. Ziemer, William H. Tranter, Signals & Systems – Continuous and
Discrete, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2002.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 7


Teaching Scheme
Credits Assigned
Sub code Subject Name (Hrs)
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC502 Applications of
Microcontroller 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
-I

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Pract
Sub code Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
and Oral Total
(out of 20) sem Work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg Exam
Applications of
ISC502 Microcontroller 20 20 20 80 25 25 -- 150
-I

Subject Subject Name Credits


Code

ISC502 Applications of Microcontroller - I 5


Course  To make the students understand the fundamentals of 8051
Objectives Microcontroller. Students should understand the working of these systems
and should be able to determine hardware and software interfacing with
real time systems. They should further understand how to design any
application based on these systems.
Course The students will be able to
Outcomes  Define Microprocessor and Microcontroller family with comparison.
 Understand working of 8051/8052and MCS251 Microcontrolle
Architecture and Programming model.
 Understand the concept of Timer, Interrupt, I/O Port interfacing with 8051
Microcontroller.
 Understand the concept of Interfacing with Real time System.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Introduction 05
Microprocessor Definition ,Microcontroller Definition Operation of ALU,
Evolution of Microprocessors ,Block Diagram of microprocessor based
system and development cycle ,RISC and CISC processors
2 MCS-51 microcontroller 09
Architecture of MCS 51 family of microcontroller, and its Variants and
comparison. Comparison of microprocessor &microcontroller. CPU
timing and machine eye le. Memory organization, SFRS. Integrated
peripherals such as Timers/Counters, Serial port, parallel I/O pins.
Interrupt Structure. Memory interfacing. Power saving & power down
mode.
3 Advanced MCS-51 architecture 06
University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 8
8052 enhancements
Indirect Memory access,Timer2 ,PCA
Architecture of MCS151
Architecture of MCS251
4 Programming & Tools 12
Simulator, in-circuit debugger, in-circuit emulator, programmers,
integrated development environment (IDE),cross compilers. Merits &
demerits of above tools.
Assembly language programming process. Programming tools. Instruction
set, addressing modes. Assembly language Programming practice using
assembly & C compiler
5 Serial communication protocols 06
Operation of serial port. Programming for implementation of
asynchronous serial communication.
Buses like
I2C
RTC –DS1307
EEPROM Memory -24C256
SPI – MCP3201
6 Interfacing & Case Studies 10
Interfacing to LCD, 7 segment display, ADC, DAC, relay, opt isolator.
Data acquisition systems, Digital weighing machine, Washing machines,
PID temperature controller ,Speed Control of DC motors and similar
system design

List of Experiments:

1. 16 bit Arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction ,multiplication)


2. Logical operation
3. Code conversion
4. Generating square wave on port pins.
5. Generation of square wave using timer
6. Interfacing keyboard, 7 segments displays.
7. Interfacing LCD display
8. Serial Communication with PC.
9. Interfacing RTC
10. Interfacing DAC and its application
11. Temperature Controller
12. Speed control of DC Motor
13. Frequency measurement
14. Implementing PID controller
15. Stepper motor control.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 9


5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term Work:
Term work consists of minimum eight tutorials. The distribution of the term work
shall be as follows,
Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignment) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Madizi M.A., The 8085 Microcontroller & Embedded systems, Pearson
Educatio Second edition.
2. Kenneth Ayala, Penram International Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd. Second
Edition.
Reference Books:
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems, TMH, Second Edition.
2. Tony Givargis, Wiley Student Edition.
3. Manoharan et.al , Microcontroller based system design, Scitech Publications
(India) Pvt. Ltd.
4. 8051 / MC151 / MCS251 Datasheets

Websites:
1. www.atmel.com
2. www.microchip.corn
3. www.nXp.com

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 10


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC503 Control System
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Design

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment Term
code End sem and Oral Total
(out of 20) Work
Exam oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Control System
ISC503 20 20 20 80 25 - 125
Design

Subject Subject Name Credits


Code

Control system Design 5


ISC503
Course  To make students understand the concept of state –space analysis ,to design
Objectives the compensator in time and frequency domain, to design the PID
compensator.
Course The students will be able to
Outcomes  Represent any system in any canonical form.
 Determine response of system
 Design Lead, Lag and Lead –lag compensator using frequency domain
method or time domain method.
 Design PID compensator.

Module Topics Hours


1. Review: Time and Frequency domain specifications, error constants, effect of 2
addition of poles and zeros on the system response, stability analysis using
bode plot and root-locus techniques.

2. State-Space Analysis of Control system: 12


Concept of state-space and state model for Linear systems-SISO and MIMO
systems, Linearization, State model for Linear continuous time system, State-
space representation using phase variables, phase variable formulation for
transfer function with poles and zeros, State-space representation using
Canonical variables, derivation of transfer function from state model.
Diagonalizaion, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Solution of State equations -
properties of state transition matrix, computation of state transition matrix
using Laplace Transformation, Cayley – Hamilton theorem.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 11


3. Controller Design using State-Space: 8
Concept of controllability and observability, definitions, phase variable
form, properties, effect of pole-zero cancellation in transfer function ,
State Feedback and Pole placement – Stabilizability, choosing pole
locations, limitations of state feedback
Tracking Problems: Integral control
Controller design - for phase variable form, by matching coefficients, by
transformation.

4. Introduction to Compensator: 11
Analysis of the basic approaches to compensation, cascade compensation,
feedback compensation, Derivative and integral error compensation,
Limitations of actuator saturation on controller design.
Compensator Design using Root-locus:
Improving steady-state error and transient response by feedback
compensation, cascade compensation, integral, derivative compensation, Lag,
Lead, Lag-Lead compensation,
5. Compensator Design using Frequency response: 8
Steady-state error characteristics of Type 0,1, and 2 systems, Time delay,
transient response through gain adjustment, Lag, Lead, Lag-Lead
compensation.
6. PID Compensator Design: 7
PID controller tuning: Cohen-coon method, Ziegler-Nichols method,
Performance analysis of designed controllers based on optimal performance
indices like ISE,ITAE,IAE and MSE. Designing PID controller using Root-
Locus and Bode plot technique.

List of Laboratory Experiments(Using MATLAB/Scilab or any equivalent


software):
1. Design of Lead Compensator in Time domain.
2. Design of Lag Compensator in Time domain.
3. Design of Lag-Lead Compensator in Time domain.
4. Design of Lead Compensator in Frequency domain.
5. Design of Lag Compensator in Frequency domain.
6. Design of Lag-Lead Compensator in Frequency domain.
7. Design of PID in Time domain.
8. Design of PID in Frequency domain.
9. Design of state feedback controller in state space using pole placement.
10. Verification of controllability and observability.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 12


respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.
Practical & Oral Examination:
6.

Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.
Term work:
Term work consists of minimum eight experiments two case studies.
The distribution of the term work shall be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignment) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term-work ensures the satisfactory


performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work.
Case Study:
1. Design a controller using time-domain/frequency domain/pole placement
approach for an inverted pendulum on a cart and simulate the same using
MATLAB/ Scilab.
2. Design a controller using time-domain/frequency domain/pole placement
approach for speed control of DC motor and simulate the same using MATLAB/
Scilab.
3. Design a controller using time-domain/frequency domain/pole placement
approach for Magnetic levitation system and simulate the same using MATLAB/
Scilab.
4. Design a controller using time-domain/frequency domain/pole placement
approach for any other physical system available in laboratory (Flow loop,
pressure loop, level loop etc.) and simulate the same using MATLAB/ Scilab.

Text Books:
1. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 4th edition,
2002.
2. Norman S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
2000.
Reference Books:
1. M. Gopal, Control Systems Principles and Design, TMH, New Delhi, 2nd
edition,2002.
2. Stefani, Shahian, Savant, Hostetter, Design of Feedback Control Systems,
Oxford University Press, 4th Edition, 2007.
3. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Addition-
Wesley,1999.
4. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, 3rd Edition, New
Age International (P) Ltd., Publishers - 2000.
5. B.C. Kuo, FaridGdna Golnaraghi, Automatic Control Systems, PHI, 7th edition,
2003.
6. Jacqueline Wilkie, Michael Johnson, Reza Kalebi, Control Engineering – an
Introductory Course, Palgrave, 2002.
7. M. N. Bandopadhay, Control Engineering - Theory & Practice, PHI, 2003

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 13


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC504 Signal
Conditioning 5* 2 - 4 1 - 5
Circuit Design
* Out of 5 Theory lecture hours – 4 hours would be Lectures and 1 hour would be for
Miniproject (for entire class)

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Subject Pract.
Internal Assessment End Term Oral
code Name and Total
(out of 20) sem Work (miniproject)
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
Signal
Conditioning
ISC504 20 20 20 80 25 25 50* 175
Circuit
Design

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Signal Conditioning Circuit Design 5


ISC504
Course Objectives  To make students understand the working principle and
design of various analog and digital signal conditioning
circuits used in industrial applications.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Understand principle of working of various signal
conditioners used with Temperature, Displacement, Optical
and various miscellaneous other sensors.
 Design signal conditioning circuits for various transducers.
 Understand applications of various signal conditioners used in
industry.
 Capable of selecting best suited signal conditioners for any
given application.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Components of Analog Signal Conditioning: Standard analog signals, 8


Signal Level and bias changes, Linearization, conversion, filtering and
impedance matching, concept of loading.
Passive signal conditioners – Voltage divider, Wheatstone bridge circuits
(Current, Voltage, Balanced and Unbalanced), RC filters.

2 Analog signal conditioners and their design: Practical applications of Op- 10


amp based circuits with design - Differentiators and Integrator, 3 op-amp
Instrumentation amplifier with applications, Precision rectifiers – Half wave,
full wave, absolute value circuit, Log and anti-log amplifier with temperature
compensation and applications, Active filters, sample and hold circuit , peak

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 14


detector, threshold detector, zero crossing detector, window detector and
Phase locked loops.

Guidelines for analog signal conditioning design and design based problems.

3 Components of Digital Signal Conditioning : Converters – ADCs and their 8


different types, DACs and their different types, V to F and F to V converters.

555 Timer – modes of operation with applications.

Characteristics of digital data – digitized value, sampled data system and


linearization.

Data acquisition system design, Encoders and Data logger circuit.

4 8
Thermal and Pressure Transducer Signal conditioning Design:
Thermal sensor signal conditioning – design considerations and applications
for RTD, Thermistor, thermocouple and solid state temperature sensors.
Pressure sensor signal conditioning - design considerations and applications
for various pressure sensors.
5 8
Optical and Other Transducer Signal Conditioning Design:
Optical sensor signal conditioning – photo-diode with photo-conducting and
photovoltaic modes, photo-transistor and photomultiplier tube.
Optical encoder signal conditioning for linear displacement, velocity and
angular displacement applications.
Other sensor signal conditioning – Potentiometer, LVDT, strain gauges,
piezoelectric transducer and capacitive transducers.
6 6
Power Supply Design: Power supply design using 78xx series, 79xx series
and adjustable voltage IC regulators like 723 and 317.
Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) – Block diagram with advantages
and disadvantages over conventional power supply.

List of Experiments:
1. To design general signal conditioning circuit to convert sensor output to 0-5 V
2. To design general signal conditioning circuit to convert sensor output to 4-20
mA
3. To design signal conditioning circuit for low level signals in micro-volts
region
4. To design absolute value circuit for an application
5. To design signal conditioning circuit for weight measuring system using strain
gauge

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 15


6. To design signal conditioning circuit for capacitive transducer
7. To design a second order LPF and HPF for any application
8. To design signal conditioning circuit for RTD
9. To design signal conditioning circuit for LDR
10. To design an analog-to-digital convertor circuit for an application
11. To design and implement Astable and Monostable Multivibrator using 555
timer
12. To design adjustable voltage regulators using IC723/ LM317

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


1.

Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Miniproject/ Orals:
Students in group of 2-3 would perform a Mini-project on any one application of
signal conditioning circuit design and appear for Oral examination of the same.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments (04 experiments from
experiment list of 1 to 6 and 04 experiments from experiment list of 7 to 12)

The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 16


by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

Text Books:
1. R a m a k a n t G a i k w a d , “ O p - a m p & L i n e a r I C s ” , P H I
Pearson Educat ion.
2. C. D. Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology (VIII Edition)”.

Reference Books:
1. Roy Choudhary, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, Wiley Eastern, 1991.
2. Coughlin & Driscoll, “Op-amp and Linear ICs” 6th Edition, PHI 2002.
3. C. D. Johnson, “Microprocessor Based Process Control” , PHI
4. Sergio Franco, “Design with op-amp analog ICs” McGraw Hill, 1988.
5. Robert G. Seippel, “Transducer Interfacing – Signal Conditioning for Process
Control”, Prentice Hill.
6. D. E. Pippenger and E. J. Tobanen, “Linear and Interface Circuits
Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1988.
7. Burr-Brown, “General Catalog”, Tucson, Ariz:Burr-Brown, 1979.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 17


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credit Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC505 Control System
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Components

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Control System
ISC505 20 20 20 80 25 25* - 150
Components

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC505 Control System Components 5


Course Objectives  This course develops the students approach to identify different
Control system components like Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electrical
and Electronic.
 Students are expected to learn different types of Transmitters.
 Students are expected to understand concept of Control Valve,
different types of Control valve, their schematic, operation, etc.
 They should able to understand different auxiliary process
components like feeders, dampers etc.
Course Outcomes  The students will demonstrate different control system
components like pumps, compressors, flapper nozzle.

 The students will demonstrate working of different pneumatic


circuits like Single acting cylinder, Double acting cylinder,
hydraulic braking systems by using directional control valves.

 The students will demonstrate the knowledge of different


transmitters, how to use SMART transmitter.

 The students will demonstrate the knowledge of control valves,


installation, different valve accessories.

 The students will learn importance of Alarm annunciators system,


square root extractor , pressure and level switches

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 18


Module Topics Hrs.

1 Pneumatics 10
Pneumatic System Components: ISO symbols
Instrument Air and Plant Air ,Air supply system and its components, Air
compressors, Pressure regulation devices, air dryers , Directional control
valves and special types of pneumatic valve such as Pilot-operated valves,
Non-return valves, Flow control valves, Sequence valves, and Time delay
valve, Linear actuators- Single-acting, Double-acting, and special type of
double-acting cylinder, Rotary actuators- Air motors, Process Control
Pneumatics: Flapper Nozzle system, Volume boosters, Air relays, Pneumatic
transmitters and controllers, Pneumatic logic gates , Pneumatic Circuits-
Standard Symbols used for developing pneumatic circuits, Sequence
diagram, dynamic modeling of pneumatic circuits.

2 Hydraulics 03
Hydraulic System Components:
Hydraulic pumps, Pressure regulation method, Loading valves, Hydraulic
valves, Hydraulic actuators (cylinder and motor) , Speed control circuits for
hydraulic actuators , Selection and comparison of pneumatic, hydraulic and
electric systems.
3 Transmitters 06
Need of transmitter, Need for Standardization of signals, concept of live zero
and dead zero, 2-wire; 3-wire and 4-wire current transmitters, Electronic
versus pneumatic transmitters, Electronic type transmitters -temperature;
pressure; differential pressure; level; flow transmitter, SMART (Intelligent)
Block schematic and Comparison with conventional transmitter, Buoyancy
transmitter and their applications, Converters- Pneumatic to Electrical and
Electrical to Pneumatic converters.
4 Process Control Valves 14
Control valve terminology: Rangeabilty, Turndown; Valve size; control
valve capacity and valve gain, Air to Open(AO), Air to Close (AC) ,selection
criterion etc. MOC (Material of construction), type of actuation,
applications, advantages, disadvantage of - Globe, Ball, Needle, Butterfly,
Diaphragm, Pinch, Gate, Solenoid, Smart control valves, and special designs
of Globe valves. Flow characteristics (Inherent and Installed), Valve
positioners: necessity, types-motion balance and force-balance, effect on
performance of control valve.Control Valve Actuators- Electrical,
Pneumatic, Hydraulic, Electro-mechanical, and Digital actuators. Selection
criteria of valve actuators.
5 Auxiliary Process Control Components 4
Construction, working & application area of-
Synchros (Transmitter and Receiver), error detector, Alarm annunciators
Fire and gas detectors (types –flame, gas, fire and gas siren), Square root
extractor, Feeders, Dampers, Temperature regulator, Flow regulator,
Temperature , Flow, Level and, Pressure Switch, Relief valves, safety valves
and rupture disk, Thermostats and Humidistat, Steeper motor

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 19


6 Industrial Control Components 14
Switches: Construction, symbolic representation, working, application of
Toggle switches, Push buttons, Selector switches, DIP switches, Rotary
switches, Thumbwheel switches , Drum switch, Limit switches- contact, non
contact- type, Switch specifications.
Control Relays: Construction, working, specifications, selection criteria and
applications of Electro-mechanical relay, Reed relay, hermetically sealed
relay, Solid state relays. Interposing relays and Overload relays.

Contactors/starters: Construction, working, specifications and applications of


starters and contactors. Comparison between relays and starters /contactors.
RFID - basic principles, frequencies, Active and passive RFID systems ,
mode of communication, various technologies for In house and outdoor
RFID systems, Basic theory and devices for vision components, sensors and
systems, Image processing and multi camera systems,

List of Experiments:

1. Study of various pneumatic and hydraulic system components.


2. Development, implementation and testing of pneumatic circuits.
3. Development, implementation and testing of hydraulic circuits.
4. Study of operation and calibration of 2-wire DP transmitter for flow and level
control.
5. Design of a two-wire temperature transmitter.
6. Study of cut-view section of pneumatically operated control valve.
7. Calibration of I to P and P to I converters.
8. Study of control valve Flow characteristics.
9. Study of valve positioner.
10. Study of different types of control valve actuator.
11. Study of pressure/temperature/level/flow switches.
12. Study of square root extractor.
13. Study of different types of control relay.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


1.

Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 20


Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.


The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks


Journal : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.
Text Books:

1. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics- A technician’s and engineer’s


guide, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai.
2. C.D.Johnson, Process Control and Instrument Technology, TMH.
3. P. Harriot, Process Control, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
4. E. B. Jones, Instrument Technology, vol-III, Butterworth Publication.
5. D.P. Ekman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley Eastern, 1990.
6. Thomas E. Kisell, Industrial Electronics, 3rd Edition, PHI.
7. I. J. Nagrath , M. Gopal , Control System Engineering, 5th Editiom, Anshan
Publishers, 2008

Reference Books:

1. Pneumatics, Festo Didactic.


2. Hydraulics, Festo Didactic
3. Bella G. Liptak, Process Control and Optimization, Instrument Engineer’s
Handbook, 4th Edition, CRC Press.
4. WG Andrews and Williams, Applied Instrumentation in the process Industries,
Vol. - I and II, Gulf Publication.
5. Less Driskell, Control Valve Selection and Sizing, ISA.
6. J. W. Hatchison, ISA Handbook of Control Valves, 2nd Edition, ISA, 1990

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 21


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC601 Process
Instrumentation 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Systems

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Process
ISC601 Instrumentation 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Systems

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Process Instrumentation Systems 5


ISC601
Course Objectives  The objective of the course is to make the students familiar with
different process dynamics in Process industries and different
control schemes generally used to get best output. It also makes
students aware of various analysis and design methods for
multivariable systems. In addition, the subject also introduces
about discrete state process control and Batch process.

Course Outcomes  The students will be able to handle any kind of process by
framing it in block diagram, mathematical model and different
process variables.
 The students will be able to handle different types of controller
like electronic, pneumatic and hydraulic.
 The students will be able to implement different control schemes
to various processes.
 The students will be able to design relay logic for various
processes.
 The students will be able to understand batch process with an
example.

Module Topics Hrs.


1 Process dynamics 04
Dynamic elements in a control loop,Dead time processes and smith predictor
compensator. Inverse response behavior of processes and compensator.
Dynamic behavior of first and second order systems. Interacting and non-
interacting systems.

Process Control Action 10


Elements of process control, Controller Principle, Process Characteristics,
Control system parameters, discontinuous, continuous and composite

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 22


controller modes/actions (P,I,D,PI,PD and PID).

3 Process Controllers and Tuning 11


General features, construction and working of Pneumatic,
Hydraulic and Electronic controller.
Process reaction curve method, Zigler-Nichols method, Cohen-
coon correction for quarter amplitude, Frequency response method,
Relay based tuning.
4 Control Schemes 08
Feedback, feedforward, cascade, ratio, split range, selective control, adaptive
control, and model based control.
5 Multivariable Control 05
Block diagram analysis of multivariable systems, Interaction, Tuning of
Multivariable controllers, relative gain analysis, Decoupler design
6 Discrete-State process control 10
Discrete state process control characteristics of the system, variables, process
specification and event sequence description, Physical ladder diagram-
elements and examples.
Introduction to Batch Process with example.

List of Experiments:
1. Study of ON-OFF Controller.
2. Study of controller modes (pure and composite) on a PID controller with a
recorder.
3. Study of specifications and wiring of an electronic PID controller with
alarm annunciator.
4. Tuning of a PID controller.
5. Study of feedback feed forward controller.
6. Study of Cascade control (wiring, settings and tuning).
7. Study of split range control.
8. Study of Ratio control.
9. Interaction analysis using RGA for a MIMO process.

Note: All above experiments should be performed on a pilot plant for real time
I/Os

Theory Examination:
1 Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2 Total 4 question need to be solved.
3 Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5 In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 23


Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignments) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

Text Books:
6. Curtis D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology, PHI /Pearson
Education 2002.
7. George Stephenopolos, Chemical process control, PHI-1999.

Reference Books:
1 M.Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, Narosa, 2002.
2 Deshpande P.B and Ash R.H, Elements of Process Control Applications, ISA
Press, New York,1995.
3. D. Patranabis, Principles of Process Control, Second edition, TMH.
4. F.G. Shinsky, Process Control System, TMH.
5. N.E. Battikha,Condensed Handbook of Measurement and Control,3rd Ed., ISA
Publication.
6. Donald P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
7. Franklyn W. Kirk, Nicholas R. Rimboi, Instrumentation, First edition,1996, D.
B. Taraporewala Sons and co. pvt ltd. – 1996

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 24


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC602 Power
Electronics and 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Drives

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Power Electronics and
ISC602 20 20 20 80 25 25* - 150
Drives

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC602 Power Electronics and Drives 5


Course Objectives  To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Power semi
conductor Devices
 To study the controlled Rectifiers, Inverters and DC to DC
converters .
 To Understand the working AC and DC Drives.
 To Study the application of Power Electronics.
Course Outcomes Students will be able to
 Understand the working of Power Electronics Devices.
 Understand working of Controlled Rectifiers ,Inverters and DC to
DC converters.
 Understand the Working of AC/DC Drives .

Chapter Contents Hours


no.
1 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES: 12
Introduction to construction, characteristics, ratings & applications of
power diodes, power BJT, power MOSFET & IGBT.
Study of Thyristors: construction, characteristics, ratings of SCR,
TRIAC, GTO.
Switching/ triggering methods: switching methods/types of triggering
devices like DIAC, UJT & PUT
Thyristor commutation Tech. (basic concepts),protection scheme against
over-current, over voltage, dv/dt cooling technique

2 THYRISTOR APPLICATION: 10
Controlled rectifiers: Principles of operations of phase controlled
converters, single phase half bridge, semi converter & bridge converters,
effect of source inductance on fully controlled bridge converter,
performance parameters Design of SCR based DC power circuits
including UJT as triggering device

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 25


AC power control using SCR-UJT & TRIAC-DIAC like universal speed
controller fan regulator Design of SCR/TRIAC based AC power control
circuits including UJT/DIAC as a triggering device
3 INVERTER 8
Principles of operation of inverters, PWM inverter, bridge inverter
,basic circuit scheme of IGBT/ power MOSFET based inverter circuits
harmonic reduction in inverter output. Inverter circuits using H bridge
for 3-phase output.

4 DC to DC Converters 7
Basic operation of choppers, study of diff. types of chopper circuits like
step up, step down chopper, four quadrant operation of chopper,
Basic concept of SMPS and Analysis of various conduction modes of
Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost, Cuk converter; design and selection of
inductor and capacitor for converters.

5 Drives 7
AC Motor Drives: Concept & requirement of drives, Current fed &
Voltage fed drives, rotor resistance control & v/f control of AC motors
DC Motor Drives : DC Drives for brushed/brushless motors
6 INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 4
Induction & dielectric heating process, block diagram, merits/demerits
Applications of power electronics in traction

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. SCR Characteristics.
2. TRIAC & DIAC characteristics.
3. Study of various triggering circuits
4. Half wave & full wave controlled rectifier
5. IGBT based inverter
6. SCR/TRIAC based AC power control circuit
7. DC motor speed control using chopper
8. PWM drive for Induction motor using IGBT

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will consist of total 6 questions carrying 20 marks each.
2. Only 5 questions need to be attempted.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to the
number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 26


Term work:
Term work consists of minimum eight experiments from the list, two simulations of
Power Electronics Circuits and a written test. The distribution of the term work shall
be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignments) :10 marks


Laboratory work (Programs / Journal) :10 marks
Attendance (Practical and Theory) :05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term-work ensures the satisfactory


performance of
Laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work
Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination
Text Books:

1. P.S. Bhimbra, Power Electronics, Khanna publishers, 2004


2. M. H. Rashid, Power Electronics, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2005
3. Power Electronics & its applications, by Alok Jain, PENRAM
International Publishing(India) Pvt.Ltd.
4. T.J.E.Miller.’Brushless magnet & Reluctance motor drives’ Claredon
Press London Power Electronics &Variable frequency drives- Technology
& Application , Bimal Bose
Reference Books:
1. P.C. Sen, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
2. Mohan Undeland Robbins, Power Electronics- Converters application &
Design, Wiley Eastern,1996
3. Dubey, Dorald, Thyristorised Power Controller,Wiley Eastern Ltd.1993
4. G.K. Dubey, Power Electronics & control, PHI 1986
5. S.K. Bhattacharya, Industrial Electronics & Control, TATA McGraw Hill,
2007
6. P.C. Sen Modern Power Electronics, Wheeler Publication
7. Modern Electric Traction by Pratab ,Dhanpat Rai and sons ,Delhi
8. Power Electronics by Cyril W. Lander, Mc Graw Hill Europe
9. Fundamentals of power Electronics with MATLAB, by Randall
Shaffer,Book News, INC,Portland(E-book Avaliable)
10. Advanced Electric Drives-Analysis, control & modeling using
SIMULINK, Ned Mohon, MNPER-2001
11. Modern Power Electronics & AC Drives, B.K. Bose, Pearson Education
Inc.2002

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 27


Sub Code Subject Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
/oral
ISC603 Digital 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Signal
Processing

Sub Subject Examination Scheme


Code Name Theory(Out of 100) Term Prac and Oral Total
Internal Assessment End Work Oral
(out of 20) Sem
Test-I Test-I Avg Exam

ISC603 Digital 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150


Signal
Processing

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


5
ISC603 Digital Signal Processing
 The principle of the syllabus is to give an introduction to basic concepts
Course of system transforms, fundamental principles and applications of signals
Objectives and filters.

 This subject provides understanding and working knowledge of design,


implementation, analysis and comparison of digital filters for processing
of discrete time signals.

Course Upon successful completion of this subject, student will be able to,
Outcomes  Determine the frequency response of FIR and IIR filters.
 Understand the relationship between poles, zeros, and stability.
 Determine the spectrum of a signal using the DFT, FFT, and spectrogram.
 Design, analyze, and implement digital filters in Matlab and C,C++.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 28


Module Contents Hours
1 Brief review: Discrete time signals and systems, difference equations, Fourier 5
series & Transform, Z-Transform, theorems, properties etc.

Introduction to digital signal processing: Block diagram of DSP, Advantages,


and Sampling Theorem, Classification of Digital Filter (IIR and FIR).

2 Discrete Fourier Transform:-Introduction to DTFT, Fourier representation 14


of finite duration sequences, the Discrete Fourier Transform, properties of
the DFT, Linear convolution using the DFT and IDFT.
Computation of the Discrete Fourier Transform: - Decimation in frequency
(DIF) algorithms, Decimation in time (DIT) algorithms for Radix 2, 3
composite. Overlap add and save Methods.

3 Analysis of Digital Filter: - Classification of filter on their pole zero diagram. 11


Frequency response of IIR filters frequency response analysis of all types of
linear phase system. Difference between IIR and FIR Filters.

Realization of systems: -Realization of IIR systems by Direct form-I, Direct


form-II, Cascade and Parallel. Realization of FIR systems by Direct form,
cascade and linear phase system.

4 Digital Filter Design Techniques:-Properties of IIR filter Discritization 8


Methods like IIT and BLT. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev-I IIR filter.

5 FIR filter Design:-Design of FIR filter by using Different Windowing 4


Technique. By using Frequency Sampling. Realization of system by using
Frequency Sampling Technique.

6 Multi rate Signal Processing:-Sampling rate reduction: decimation by integer 6


factors, Sampling rate increase: interpolation by integer factors, sampling rate
conversion by non integer factors.

Introduction to Digital Hardware and Applications:-Digital signal processor


series Texas 320, Motorola 56000. Applications to speech, Radar, CT scanner
and Digital touch tone receiver.

List of experiments:
(Experiments 1 to 6 Using C or C++ and verifying the results using MATLAB)
1. Program for finding linear convolution.
2. Program for finding circular convolution.
3. Program for finding linear convolution using circular convolution.
4. Program for finding correlation (auto and cross).
5. Program for finding DFT's. & IDFT.
6. Implementation of FFT algorithms (DIT, DIF) etc.
7. Program on filter designing.(FIR) (Using MATLAB only).

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 29


8. Program on Filter Designing. (IIR) (Using MATLAB only).
9. Minimum two assignments based on structure realizations (IIR, FIR).
10. Study of any DSP processor series and their differences.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as,
six questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be
attempted by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers
of end semester examination.
Text Books:
1. A.V.Oppenhiem & R.W. Scheirer, Discrete signal processing, (PHI) 1999.
2. Johny Johnson, Introduction to D.S.P., (PHI), 1996.
Reference Books:
1. Rabnier Gold, Theory and application of DSP, (PH[ EEE edi.) 1996.
2. Proakis and Manoliakis, Digital signal processing. (PHl 3rd) 1997.
3. Sanjit. K. Mitra, Computer aided approach t0 DSP, TMH, 1998.
4. A Antoniou, Digital filter analysis, design and application, TMH pub. 2nd.
1993.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 30


5. B. Vankataramani & M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, Tala 1cGraw
Hill.2002.
6. Emmauel c: Ifeachor & Barrie W. Jervis, Digital Signal Processing, Pearson
Education, 2ndedition, 2000.
7. Ashok Arnbardar, Analog and Digital Signal Processing, Thomson Learning,
2nd edition, 1999.
8. Thonas J. Cavicchi, Digital Signal Processing, Jhon Wiley 20001.
9. Digital Signal Processing by Chen, Oxford University Press

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 31


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC604 Applications of
Microcontroller 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
- II

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test Test oral
Avg. Exam
1 2
Applications of
ISC604 20 20 20 80 25 25* -- 150
Microcontroller - II

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC604 Applications of Microcontroller - II 5


Course Objectives  To make the students understand the fundamentals of PIC
Microcontroller. Students should understand the working of these
systems and should be able to determine hardware and software
Interfacing with real time systems. They should further
understand how to design any application based on these systems.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Define Embedded system and its Applications in industry.
 Understand working of PIC 18F Microcontroller Architecture and
Programming model.
 Understand the concept of Timer, Interrupt, I/O Port interfacing
with PIC 18F Microcontroller.
 Understand the concept of Interfacing with Real time System.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Embedded systems: 04
Definition, embedded system overview, classifications, Design challenges,
processor technology, IC technology and Design Technology and tradeoffs.
Examples of embedded system.
2 PIC 18F Microcontroller architecture Hardware 10
PIC 18F Microcontroller family, PIC18F architecture, features
PIC18F4520 , Block diagram, Oscillator configuration, power saving modes
Memory model, EEPROM and RAM , Program Memory. Hardware
multiplier, Interrupts, I/O ports, Timer, capture/compare/PWM (CCP)
module, ECCP module. Master syschronous Master Synchronous Serial Port
(Mssp) Module, Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter (Eusart), Analog-To-Digital Converter (A/D) Module,
Comparator Module.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 32


3 PIC 18F Software: 12
PIC 18F Instruction set, Instruction format, Integrated
Development Environment(IDE), Assembling, Debugging, and
Executing a program Using MPLAB IDE in assembly and
embedded C, Data copy operation ,Arithmetic operation, Branch
and Skip operation, Logic operations, bit Operation, Stack and
Subroutine, Code conversion programs and Software Design.
4 10
Case Study:
I/O port Interfacing, Interfacing O/P peripherals such as seven segment LED,
LCD, Interfacing I/P peripheral such as push button keys, Matrix keyboard,
interfacing sensors using Analog to Digital convertor module, D/A
convertor module, Interfacing a temperature sensor to the A/D convertor
module. PWM generation for different applications.
5 Serial I/O: 06
Basic concept in serial communication, EIA-232 and PIC 18 serial
communication module ,USART, SPI, I²C(Inter-Integrated Ckt) Protocol.

6 Real Time Operating System (RTOS) 06

Introduction to RTOS concept. RTOS Scheduling models. Task scheduling


examples using different algorithms. Interrupt latency and response times of
the tasks as performance metrics. Example of any tiny RTOS.

List of Experiments:
16. 16 bit Arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction ,multiplication)
17. Logical operation
18. Code conversion
19. Generating square wave on port pins.
20. Generation of square wave using timer
21. Interfacing keyboard, 7 segments displays.
22. Interfacing LCD display
23. Serial Communication with PC.
24. Interfacing RTC
25. Interfacing DAC and its application
26. Temperature Controller
27. Speed control of DC Motor
28. Frequency measurement
29. Implementing PID controller
30. Stepper motor control.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 33


5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term Work:
Term work consists of minimum eight tutorials. The distribution of the term work
shall be as follows,
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.
Text Books:
1. Madizi M.A., PIC 18F Microcontroller & Embedded systems, Pearson
Education Second edition.
2. Ramesh Gaokar,Fundamentals of Microcontrollers and applixcation in
Embedded sytem(With PIC 18 Microcontroller family)Penram International
Publishing.

Reference Books:
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems, TMH, Second Edition.
2. Tony Givargis, Embedded system design Wiley Student Edition.
3. Peatman,Design with PICMicrocontroller,Pearson Education.
4. Han-way Huang,PIC Microcontroller,India Edition
Websites:
1. www.microchip.com
2. www.atmel.com
3. www.nxp.com

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 34


Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Sub code Subject Name
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC605 Industrial data
communication 4 2 - 4 1 - 5

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Internal Assessment Pract.
Sub code Subject Name End Term
(out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work oral
Test
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Industrial data
ISC605 communication 20 20 20 80 25 - - 125

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION 5


ISC605
Course Objectives  To make students understand the OSI reference model, LAN
network, different Open control network, Networks at different
levels such as sensor level, device network control, HART,
Foundation field bus, Wireless technologies

Course Outcomes The students will be able to


 Understand basic reference model, LAN for networking.
 Understand various architecture/working of different protocol.
 Make comparative study of various wireless technology.

Understand applications of various protocols in industry.

Module Contents Hours


1 Introduction: 09
OSI reference model, LAN architecture and topology
Transmission media:UTP cable,STP cable,co-axial cable,fiber
optics,wireless media
Data Link Layer,MAC sublayer(media access algorithums),error
detection and correction code
Network components: repeaters, bridge, hub, switch, router, gateways

2 Open control network: RS232, RS422, EIA 485, Ethernet- MODBUS 07


– structure, function codes and implementation, General Purpose
Instrument Bus, specifications.
Proprietary control network: MODBUS plus, data highway plus.
3 Networks at different levels: 08
Sensor level network: AS-i, CAN, Devicenet, Interbus and LON
Device network: Foundation Fieldbus –H1, HART, PROFIBUS-PA

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 35


Control network: BACnet, ControlNet, FF-HSE, PROFIBUS-DP,
Ethernet, TCP/IP
4 HART: 06
Architecture – physical, data link, application layer, communication
technique, normal and burst mode of communication, troubleshooting,
benefits of HART.
5 Foundation fieldbus: 12
Fieldbus requirement, features, advantages, fieldbus components, types,
architecture–physical, data link, application layer, system and network
management, wiring, segment functionality checking, installation in
safe and hazardous area and troubleshooting, function block application
process.
OPC Architecture
6 Wireless technologies: 06
Satellite systems, Wireless LANs (WLANs), WiFi, VPAN, Zigbee,
bluetooth GPRS and – their comparison, limitations and characteristics.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will consist of total 6 questions carrying 20 marks each.


2. Only 4 questions need to be attempted.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to the
number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term Work:
Term work consists of minimum eight experiments based on above syllabus, two
assignment. The distribution of the term work shall be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments and Journal) :10 marks


Test (at least one) :10 marks
Attendance (Practical and Theory) :05 marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 36


Text Books:
1. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay ,Edwin Wright, Practical Industrial Data
Communications, 1st edition ELSEVIER, 2005.
2. Lawrence M Thompson, Industrial data Communication, 2nd edition, 1997.

Reference Books:
1. Daniel T Miklovic, Real time control network, ISA 1993.
2. Bela G Liptak, Process software and digital networks, 3rd edition, 2002.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 4th Edition, PHI/Pearson
Education, 2002.
4. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, 2nd update
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2000.
5. Douglas E. Comer, Computer Networks and Internets, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, 5th Indian reprint, 2001.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 37


Subject Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract Tut. Theory Pract Tut. Total
ISC606 Analytical
Instrumentation
3 2 -- 3 1 -- 4

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Subject Internal Assessment End
Subject Name Exam Term Tota
code (out of 20) sem Oral
duration Work l
Exa
Test 1 Test 2 Avg (inHrs)
m
ISC606 Analytical
Instrumentatio 20 20 20 80 03 25 - 125
n

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


ISC606 Analytical Instrumentation 4
Course Objectives To introduce the basic concept of qualitative and quantitative analysis of a
given sample.
To study various spectroscopic techniques and its instrumentation.
To study the concept of separation science and its applications.
To study the concept of industrial analyzers and its applications.

Course Outcomes  The students get well versed with the principle, construction and
working of various analytical instruments.
 Students get detailed information about the applications of analytical
techniques in medicine, industry etc.

Module Contents Hours

1 Introduction: Introduction to analytical process, selection of 05


instruments for application in industries. Compare classical analytical
techniques with instrumental techniques.
Fundamentals of Spectroscopy: Nature of Electromagnetic
Radiation, Electromagnetic spectrum, Numerical on EMR and laws of
photometry.
Introduction to spectroscopic methods, Instrumentation of
spectroscopic analytical system – Radiation sources, filters and
monochromators, diffraction grating, detectors, signal processors and
readout modules.
2 Molecular Spectroscopy: Molecular Energy levels, correlation of 10
energy levels with transitions.
a) Electronic transitions and Vibrational transitions – Introduction
to UV-VIS molecular spectroscopy – basics of single beam, double
beam spectrophotometer and filter photometer, its instrumentation and
applications. Fluoroscopy, Phosphoroscopy and Raman Spectroscopy
– basic principle, components and its instrumentation. Basic principle

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 38


of IR absorption spectroscopy.
b) Nuclear/Rotational transitions – Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
(NMR), spectroscopy, basic principle and its instrumentation,
constructional details of NMR, numerical. Basic principle of ESR.

3 Atomic Spectroscopy: Atomic Energy levels, Atomic absorption 03


spectroscopy – components, working and absorption spectra.
Atomic Emission spectroscopy – components, working and emission
spectra, comparison between AAS and AES.
4 Separation Science: 10
a) Chromatography: Fundamentals of chromatographic separations,
classification. Solid, liquid, gas chromatographic system with
components, factors affecting separation, applications. Analysis of Gas
Chromatogram.
b) Mass Spectrophotometers: Components of Mass Spectrometer,
Types of mass spectrometers, sample handling techniques for liquids
and solids, resolution, numericals on resolution.
Interfacing Chromatography and Mass spectrometry.
5 Radio Chemical Instrumentation: 06
Radio chemical methods, radiation detectors – Ionization chamber,
Geiger Muller counter, proportional counter, scintillation counter,
semiconductor detectors, pulse height analyzer.
X-ray spectroscopy and Gas analyzers:
Production of X-ray spectra, Instrumental methods, detectors, X-ray
absorption meters.

6 Industrial Gas Analyzers: 02


Oxygen, carbon dioxide (CO2), carbon monoxide (CO), NOx
analyzers, Gas density analyzer, online gas analyzers.

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. Photoelectric Colorimeter
2. Nephalo-turbidity meter
3. Densitometer
4. Refractometer
5. Single beam Spectrometer for UV/VIS range.
6. Double beam Spectrometer for UV/VIS range.
7. Gas Chromatograph
8. Atomic absorption spectrometer
9. Balance Cell Calorimeter
10. Spectroflourimeter
11. Geiger Muller Counter.
12. Scintillation Counter.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will consist of total 6 questions carrying 20 marks each.
2. Only 4 questions need to be attempted.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 39


4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and weightage of each module
will be proportional to the number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in
the syllabus.

Practical & Oral Examination:


Practical examination will be based on one experiment performed from the list of
experiments given in the syllabus and the oral will be based on entire subject.

Term work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.The distribution of marks for
term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments / Assignments) :10 marks


Laboratory work (Programs / Journal) :10 marks
Attendance (Practical and Theory) :05 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory
class test (on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment
on live problems or course project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six
questions to be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted
by students. Minimum 80% syllabus should be covered in question papers of end
semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Willard, Merritt, Dean, Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis, CBS
Publishers &
2. Distributors, New Delhi, 7th ed..
3. Khandpur R. S., Handbook of Analytical Instruments, Tata McGraw–
Hill Publications, 3rd ed..

Reference Books:
1. Skoog, Holler, Nieman, Thomson Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Books-
Cole publications, 5th ed..
2. Ewing Galen W., Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, 5th ed.
3. Braun Robert D., Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw-Hill Book
Company.

4. Sherman R.E., Analytical Instrumentation, ISA Publication.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 40


AC 7/6/201
Item No. – 4.31

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Program: Bachelor of Engineering

Course: Instrumentation Engineering


(R – 2012)

B. E. - Sem. VII & VIII

(As Per Credit Based Semester and Grading System with effect from the
Academic year 2015–2016)
From Dean’s Desk:
To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to
be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal
means of quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to
measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of
Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome
based education in the process of curriculum development.
Faculty of Technology, University of Mumbai, in one of its meeting unanimously resolved that,
each Board of Studies shall prepare some Program Educational Objectives (PEO’s) and give
freedom to affiliated Institutes to add few (PEO’s) and course objectives and course outcomes to be
clearly defined for each course, so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the
depth and approach of course to be taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. It was
also resolved that, maximum senior faculty from colleges and experts from industry to be involved
while revising the curriculum. I am happy to state that, each Board of studies has adhered to the
resolutions passed by Faculty of Technology, and developed curriculum accordingly. In addition to
outcome based education, semester based credit and grading system is also introduced to ensure
quality of engineering education.
Semester based Credit and Grading system enables a much-required shift in focus from teacher-
centric to learner-centric education since the workload estimated is based on the investment of time
in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on continuous evaluation which will enhance the
quality of education. University of Mumbai has taken a lead in implementing the system through its
affiliated Institutes and Faculty of Technology has devised a transparent credit assignment policy
and adopted ten points scale to grade learner’s performance. Credit assignment for courses is based
on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be taught in 12-13 weeks
and remaining 3-2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond
syllabus etc.
Credit and grading based system was implemented for First Year of Engineering from the academic
year 2012-2013. Subsequently this system will be carried forward for Second Year Engineering in
the academic year 2013-2014, for Third Year and Final Year Engineering in the academic years
2014-2015 and 2015-2016 respectively.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande
Dean,
Faculty of Technology,
Member - Management Council, Senate, Academic Council
University of Mumbai, Mumbai

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 1


Preamble:
The overall technical education in our country is changing rapidly in manifolds. Now it is very
much challenging to maintain the quality of education with its rate of expansion. To meet present
requirement a systematic approach is necessary to build the strong technical base with the quality.
Accreditation will provide the quality assurance in higher education and also to achieve recognition
of the institution or program meeting certain specified standards. The main focus of an accreditation
process is to measure the program outcomes, essentially a range of skills and knowledge that a
student will have at the time of graduation from the program that is being accredited. Faculty of
Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome
based education in the process of curriculum development.

I, as Chairman, Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering of University of Mumbai, happy to state


here that, Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) were finalized for undergraduate program in
Electrical Engineering, more than twenty senior faculty members from the different institutes
affiliated to University of Mumbai were actively participated in this process. Few PEOs were
finalized for undergraduate program in Electrical Engineering are listed below;

 To provide the overall strong technical foundation to formulate, solve and analyse
engineering problems during undergraduate program.
 To prepare students to demonstrate an ability to identify, formulate and solve electrical
based issues.
 To prepare students to demonstrate ability in the area of design, control, analyse and
interpret the electrical and electronics systems.
 To prepare students for successful career in industry, research and development.
 To develop the ability among students for supervisory control and data acquisition for power
system application.
 To provide opportunity for students to handle the multidisciplinary projects.
 To create the awareness of the life-long learning and to introduce them to professional ethics
and codes of professional practice.
The affiliated institutes may include their own PEOs in addition to the above list to support the
philosophy of outcome based education, in addition to stated PEOs, objectives and expected
outcomes are also included in the curriculum. I know, this is a small step taken to enhance and
provide the quality education to the stake holders.

Chairman,
Board of Studies in Electrical Engineering,
University of Mumbai

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 2


Semester VII

Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned


Subject
Subject Name Pract/ Pract/
Code Theory Theory Total
Tut. Tut.
Industrial Process
ISC701 4 2 4 1 5
Control
Biomedical
ISC702 4 2 4 1 5
Instrumentation
Advanced Control
ISC703 4 2 4 1 5
Systems
ISC704 Process Automation 4 2 4 1 5
ISE705X Elective-I 4 2 4 1 5
ISP706 Project-I - 6 - 3 3
Total 20 16 20 8 28

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Ter
Subject Internal Prac
Subject Name End Exam m
Code Assessment t./ Total
Sem Duration wor
Test Test Oral
Avg. exam (in Hrs) k
1 2
Industrial Process
ISC701 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
Control
Biomedical
ISC702 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
Instrumentation
Advanced Control
ISC703 20 20 20 80 03 25 25* 150
Systems
ISC704 Process Automation 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
ISE705X Elective-I 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150

ISP706 Project-I -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50

Total 100 400 -- 150 150 800

* Includes both Practical and Oral examination

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 3


Semester VIII

Subject
Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
Code
Pract/ Pract./
Theory Theory Total
Tut Tut.
ISC801 Digital Control System 4 2 4 1 5
Instrumentation Project
ISC802 Documentation and 4 2 4 1 5
Execution
Instrument and System
ISC803 4 2 4 1 5
Design
ISE804X Elective II 4 2 4 1 5
ISP805 Project-II. - 12 - 6 6
Total 16 20 16 10 26

Examination scheme
Theory Marks
Ter
Subject Internal Prac
Subject Name End Exam m
Code Assessment t./ Total
Sem Duration wor
Test Test Oral
Avg. exam (in Hrs) k
1 2
Digital Control
ISC801 20 20 20 80 03 25 25* 150
System
Instrumentation
Project
ISC802 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
Documentation and
Execution
Instrument and
ISC803 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150
System Design
Elective II
ISE804X 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150

ISP805 Project-II. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 100

Total 80 320 -- 150 150 700

Subject Subject
Elective - I Elective II
Code Code
ISE7051 Advanced Embedded System ISE8041 Nuclear Instrumentation
ISE7052 Image Processing ISE8042 Power Plant Instrumentation

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 4


ISE7053 Functional Safety ISE8043 Optimal Control theory
ISE7054 Process Modeling & Optimization ISE8044 Nano Technology
ISE7055 Wireless communication ISE8045 Fiber Optic Instrumentation

Project Guidelines
Project –I and II: Students groups and load of faculty per week
Project Groups: Students can form groups with minimum 2 (Two) and not more than 4 (Four)
Faculty Load: In semester VII - 1 (one) period of 1 hour per week per project group
In semester VIII - 2 (Two) period of 1 hour each per week per project group
Each faculty is permitted to take (guide) maximum 4 (Four) project groups.

Note: The project load for students in VII semester is 6hrs and 12 hrs in VIII semester.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 5


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC701 Industrial
Process 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Control

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Industrial Process
ISC701 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Control

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC701 Industrial Process Control 5


Course Objectives  To make the students understand all the processes involved in the
industries, the various unit operations and be able to apply control
schemes to these processes to get the output with desired
specifications.
 To make the students acquainted with safety and hazards in
industry.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Get a complete overview of strategies for process control.
 Know all the industrial processes and demonstrate their
knowledge in designing the control loops for these processes..
 Understand the safety related terms such as classification of
hazards in the industry and design Hazard free plant.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 6


Module Topics Hrs.

1 Control System for Heat transfer unit operations: 13

Heat exchangers: classification as per fluid flow arrangement and


construction, feedback, feed-forward, bypass control schemes, fouling in
heat exchangers.
Boiler controls: Basic designs of boilers- fire-tube and water-tube boilers.
Typical boiler equipment. Terms related- Shrink and swell effect and excess
oxygen, boiler efficiency. Boiler controls- Steam temperature control, Boiler
pressure control, Combustion control-Type 1,2,3 and 4, Drum level control-
Single, two and three element, Furnace draft control, safety interlocks and
Burner Management System.
Evaporator control: Evaporator terminologies, Types of Evaporator and
multiple effect evaporator, control systems for Evaporator – feedback,
cascade, feed forward and selective control.
Furnace control: Start- up heaters, fired re-boilers, process and safety
controls.
2 Control System for Heat and mass transfer unit operations 12

Distillation column: Basic principle, Distillation equipment and its


accessories. Batch and continuous distillation, Binary product distillation,
multi-product distillation, side-draw product distillation column. Distillation
column control strategies- Top and bottom product composition controls,
Using chromatograph, Pressure controls, Vacuum distillation, Vapour
recompression and pressure control, Feed controls- Column feed controls
and Feed temperature control, economizer
Dryer control: Process of drying, types of dryer- Tray, Vacuum dryer,
fluidized bed, Double drum dryer, rotary, turbo and spray, and their control
strategies.
Crystallizers: Super-saturation methods, Process of crystallization, types of
crystallizer, control of evaporating crystallizer, cooling crystallizers, vacuum
crystallizers.
Reactor control: Reactor characteristics, runaway reaction, various schemes
of temperature control of reactors.

3 Miscellaneous process equipments 05


Compressor- Classification, Phenomenon of Surge for centrifugal
compressors, Methods of surge control for compressors.
Gas turbine- Introduction, gas turbine layouts, closed cycle gas
turbine, Engine controls.

4 Continuous Process Industries: 07


Refinery Industry: Process flow diagram, separation, treatment-Hydro-
desulphurization unit, conversion methods- Fluid Catalytic Cracking,
blending, sensors and contrl schemes.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 7


Iron and steel Industry: Process flow diagram, Sensors and Control
schemes.
5 Batch Process Industries: 07
Food processing: Milk pasteurization.
Pharmaceutical industries- Penicillin-G production, sensors and control
schemes
6 Safety in Instrumentation control systems: 04
Area and material classification as per IEC and NEC standard, techniques
used to reduce explosion hazards, intrinsic safety, and installation of
intrinsically safe systems.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term work:
Term work consists of minimum six assignments/experiments, two case studies related to process
industries, may be analytical or through Industrial visit. Suggested experiments may contain Process
and Control Simulation on Distillation Column, Heat Exchanger etc.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (Assignments / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 8


Text Books :

1. W.L.McCabe and Julian Smith “Unit operation and chemical engineering” Tata
McGrawHill- fifth edition.
2. Bela G. Liptak “Instrument engineers handbook- Process control” Chilton book company-
3rd edition.
3. Bela G. Liptak “Instrumentation in the processing industries” Chilton book company-1st
edition.

Reference Books :

1. M. Chidambaram, “Complete Control of Processes”, Narosa Publishing House.


2. Douglas M. Concidine “ Process industrial instruments and controls handbook” Mc-
GrawHill- 4th edition.
3. George T. Austin “Shreve’s chemical process industries” Mc-GrawHill- fifth edition.
4. George Stephenopoulos, “Chemical process control”, PHI-1999.
5. David Lindsey, “Power Plant control and instrumentation – control of boilers HRSG”,
Institution of Engineering and Technology.
6. G.F. Gilman “Boiler Control Systems Engineering”, 2005, ISA Publication.
7. A.M.Y.Razak, Industrial gas turbines Performance and operability”, CRC Press Woodhead
Publishing Limited and CRC Press LLC.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 9


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC702 Biomedical
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Instrumentation

Examination Scheme
Theory (out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
code and Oral Total
(out of 20) sem Work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg Exam
Biomedical
ISC702 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Instrumentation

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC702 Biomedical Instrumentation 5


Course Objectives  To make students understand the Identification, classification, and
working principle of various Biomedical Instruments used for
Bio-potential measurement and application of these instruments in
diagnosis, therapeutic treatment and imaging fields.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Identify various Bio-potential and their specifications in terms of
amplitude and frequency.
 Understand principle and working of various Biomedical
Instruments for diagnosis applications.
 Decide the applications of therapeutic instruments for treatment
purpose.
 Understand applications of imaging instruments and the
modalities involved in each technique.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Bio-Potential and Measurement:


Structure of Cell, Origin of Bio-potential, electrical activity of cell their
characteristic and specifications. Measurement of RMP and AP. Electrode- 08
Electrolyte interface and types of bio-potential electrodes.

2 Physiological Systems and Related Measurement:


Respiratory system- Physiology of respiration and measurements of
respiratory related parameters. 12
Cardiovascular system- Structure of Heart, Electrical and Mechanical
activity of Heart, ECG measurements and Cardiac arrhythmias.
Nervous system- Nerve cell, neuronal communication, nerve-muscle
physiology, CNS, PNS. Generation of EEG and its measurement. Normal
and abnormal EEG, evoked potential and epilepsy.
Muscular system- Generation of EMG signal, specification and
measurement.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 10


Design of ECG amplifier.

3 Cardiovascular Measurement:
Blood Pressure- Direct and Indirect types, Blood Flow- Electromagnetic and
Ultrasonic types, Blood Volume- Types of Plethysmography. (Impedance, 08
Capacitive and Photoelectric), Cardiac Output- Flicks method, Dye-dilution
and Thermo-dilution type, Heart sound measurement.

4 Life support Instruments:


Pacemaker- Types of Pacemaker, mode of pacing and its application,
Defibrillator- AC and DC Defibrillators and their application, Heart Lung 08
machine and its application during surgery, Haemodialysis system and the
precautions to be taken during dialysis.
5 Imaging Techniques:
X-Ray- Generation, X-ray tube and its control, X-ray machine and its
application, CT Scan- CT Number, Block Diagram, scanning system and
application, Ultrasound Imaging- Modes of scanning and their application, 10
MRI- Concepts and image generation, block diagram and its application.

Significance of Electrical Safety:


6
Physiological effects of electrical current, Shock Hazards from electrical 02
equipment and methods of accident prevention.
* One Hospital Visit is recommended for imaging Instruments.
List of Experiments:
 Demonstration and working of instruments like EMG, EEG and ECG.
 Study of electrodes for various applications.
 To measure Blood pressure by indirect method.
 To study Pacemaker and various waveforms or Design and implement Pacemaker CKT.
 To study Defibrillator and voltage waveforms or Design and implement Defibrillator CKT.
 Design of ECG amplifier and testing of gain frequency response with weak input signal.
 To design and implement ECG signal conditioning circuits with different parameter.
 To design and implement EMG quantification Circuit.
 Testing and study of Hemodialysis, Heart/Lung machine models based.
 ECG simulation on PC.
 ECG Simulation using Microcontroller.
Theory Examination:
 Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
 Total 4 question need to be solved.
 Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
 In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 11


Practical/Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus and experiments performed.

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.


The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (Assignments / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 1980.
2. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th edition, 2010.
3. R. S. Khandpur, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, TMH, 2004

Reference Books:
1. Richard Aston, “Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Instruments”, PH, 1991.
2. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,
PHI/Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2001.
3. John E Hall, Gyton’s Medical Physiology, 12th edition, 2011

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 12


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC703 Advanced
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Control System

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Advanced Control
ISC703 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150
System

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Advanced Control system 5


ISC703
Course  To make students understand the concept of non linear control,
Objectives Internal Model Control and Optimal Control.
 To Study the stability of Non Linear and Linear systems .
Course Outcomes The Students will be able to

 Linearize the non linear physical systems.


 Study the non linear system behavior by phase plane and describing
function methods
 Study the stability of linear and nonlinear systems by Lyapunov
method.

 Design IMC with Uncertainty and Disturbances.

Module Content Hours


Prerequisite Modeling of linear systems, Simulation of system, System stability
through transient response and frequency response techniques.
Superposition theorem for differentiating linear and nonlinear systems.

1 Introduction 8
Norms for Signals and Systems, Input-Output relationships,
Nonlinear Control Systems
Definition of nonlinear systems, Difference between linear and
nonlinear systems, characteristics of nonlinear systems, Common
physical nonlinearities
Linearization Methods
Jacobian Linearization, Concept of relative degree, Feedback
linearization for systems with no internal dynamics.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 13


2. Phase-plane Analysis 10
Phase-plane Analysis, Basic concepts, phase-trajectories, phase
portrait, Constructing phase portraits-Analytical Methods, Graphical
Method - Delta Method, Determining Time from Phase Portraits,
Singular points and their classification, limit cycles and behavior of
limit cycles.

3. Describing Function Analysis 8


Describing Function Fundamentals, Describing Functions of
saturation, dead zone, relay and their combinations, Stability analysis
of nonlinear systems via describing function method .

4. Lyapunov Stability Analysis 10


Stability of equilibria, Asymptotic stability graphically , Lyapunov
stability theorems, Stability analysis of linear systems, Construction of
Lyapunov functions using Krasovskii method and variable gradient
method.
5. Internal Model Control 8
Introduction to Model-Based Control, Open loop controller Design,
Model Uncertainty and Disturbances, Development of IMC structure,
IMC-Based PID Controller Design

6 Optimal Control 4
Problem Formulation, Continuous linear regulator problem
(LQR),Solution via Control Algebraic Riccati Equation (CARE)

List of Laboratory Experiments

 Nonlinear Control System and Analysis


a) Construct the trajectory for system represented by second order differential equation and for
any initial condition by using Delta Method.
b) Draw the trajectory for the system with nonlinear element – relay, saturation, etc. for any
initial condition and step input by using Delta Methods.
c) Study behavior of limit cycle with the help of Vander Pol's equation.
d) Derivation of DF for nonlinearities – relay with saturation, relay with dead-zone, dead-zone
and saturation etc.
e) Investigate the stability of system with nonlinearities – relay, saturation, dead-zone and
existence of limit cycle using DF technique.
 Lyapunov Stability Analysis
a) Verify Sylvester theorem for the definiteness of the Lyapunov Function.
b) Determine the stability of the system and construct the Lyapunov function for Linear Time
Invariant system.
c) By using Krasovskii method determine the stability of the system and construct the
Lyapunov function.
d) By using Variable Gradient method determine the stability of the nonlinear system.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 14


 Internal Model Control
a) Effect of filter tuning parameter on step response of the first and second order systems.
b) Design of IMC controller for a system subject to step input.
c) Design of IMC controller for a system subject to ramp input.
d) Design of IMC based PID controller.
e) Design of IMC controller for delay and non-minimum phase systems.
 Optimal Control
a) Obtain control for the second order system using given Quadratic Function.
b) Obtain control for the second order system via solution of Riccati Equation.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will consist of total 6 questions carrying 20 marks each.


2. Only 4 questions need to be attempted.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to the number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.
6. No questions should be asked from the prerequisite module.
Term work:

Term work consists of minimum eight experiments, two case studies and a written test. The
distribution of the term work shall be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments and Journal) :15marks


Test (at least one) :10 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term-work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.

End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 15


Text Books:

 K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 4th edition, 2002.
 I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, 3rd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Publishers - 2000.

Reference Books:
1. Slotine, Li - “Applied Nonlinear Control”
2. M. Gopal, "Modern Control System Theory", Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
3. John Doyle, Bruce Francis, Allen Tannenbaum, “Feedback Control Theory”.
4. Pierre R. Belanger, “Control Engineering” Saunders college Publishing.
5. Donald E. Kirk, “Optimal Control Theory- An Introduction,”.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 16


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC704 Process
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Automation

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
ISC704 Process Automation 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISC704 Process Automation 5


Course Objectives  To make the students understand the fundamentals of automation
and various automation systems used in industry such as PLC, DCS,
and SCADA. Students should understand the working of these
systems and should be able to determine hardware and software
requirements of PLC, DCS and SCADA. They should further
understand how to design any application based on these systems.
Also they should understand the requirements of safety and design
safety instrumented systems.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Define automation, it’s importance, expectations from
automation and applications in industry.
 Understand working of PLC, I/O modules of PLC, Programming
languages and instructions of PLC, design PLC based application
by proper selection and sizing criteria, developing GUI and ladder
program.
 Understand evolution and architecture of DCS, hierarchical
control in DCS, programming DCS through function Block
Diagram (FBD) method.
 SCADA architecture, communication in SCADA, develop any
application based on SCADA along with GUI using SCADA
software.
 Understand the need of SIS, risk reduction methods, evaluation
of SIL( Safety Integrity Levels)

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Automation Fundamentals 04
Automation and its importance, automation applications, expectations of
automation. Process and factory automation.
Types of plant and control – categories in industry, open loop and close loop

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 17


control functions, continuous processes, discrete processes, and mixed
processes.
Automation hierarchy – large control system hierarchy, data quantity &
quality and hierarchical control.
Control system architecture – evolution and current trends, comparison of
different architectures.

2 Programmable Logic Controller 14


Hardware
Evolution of PLC, Definition, functions of PLC, Advantages, Architecture,
working of PLC, Scan time, Types & Specifications.
DI-DO-AI-AO examples and ratings, I/O modules, local and remote I/O
expansion, special purpose modules, wiring diagrams of different I/O
modules, communication modules,
Memory & addressing- memory organization (system memory and
application memory), I/O addressing, hardware to software interface.
Software
Development of Relay Logic Ladder Diagram, introduction to PLC
Programming, programming devices, IEC standard PLC programming
languages, LD programming- basic LD instructions, PLC Timers and
Counters: Types and examples, data transfer & program control instructions,
advanced PLC instructions, PID Control using PLC.
Case study:
PLC selection and configuration for any one process applications.
3 Distributed Control System (DCS) 12
Introduction to DCS. Evolution of DCS, DCS flow sheet symbols,
architecture of DCS. Controller, Input and output modules, Communication
module, data highway, local I/O bus, Workstations, Specifications of DCS.
Introduction of Hierarchical control of memory: Task listing, Higher and
Lower computer level task.
Supervisory computer tasks DCS configuration. Supervisory computer
functions, Control techniques, Supervisory Control Algorithm. DCS &
Supervisory computer displays, advanced control Strategies, computer
interface with DCS.
DCS. System integration with PLCs computer: HMI, Man machine
interface sequencing, Supervisory control, and integration with PLC,
personal computers and direct I/O, serial linkages, network linkages, link
between networks.
Introduction to DCS Programming, Function Block Diagram method for
DCS programming.

4 10
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
SCADA introduction, brief history of SCADA, elements of SCADA.
Features of SCADA , MTU- functions of MTU, RTU- Functions of RTU,
Protocol Detail
SCADA as a real time system Communications in SCADA- types &

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 18


methods used, components, Protocol structure and Mediums used for
communications
SCADA Development for any one typical application
Programming for GUI development using SCADA software.
5 Database and Alarm Management, MES, ERP 04
Database management,
Philosophies of Alarm Management, Alarm reporting, types of alarms
generated and acceptance of alarms.
MES, Integration with enterprise system.

6 04
Safety Instrumented System (SIS)
Need for safety instrumentation- risk and risk reduction methods, hazards
analysis. Process control systems and SIS.
Safety Integrity Levels (SIL) and availability. Introduction to the
international functional safety standard IEC61508

List of Experiments:

1. Manipulation of sensor signals by the PLC to drive various end effectors such as
pnematic/electric/hydraulic
2. 4 PLC programs for process control applications
3. DCS programming using Function block diagram method
4. GUI development for any one application using SCADA software.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire subject

Term Work:
Term work shall consists of minimua 4 experiments and four assignments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 19


The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1 Samuel M. Herb , “ Understanding Distributed Processor Systems for Control”, ISA Publication.
2. Thomas Hughes, “Programmable Logic Controller”, ISA Publication.
3. Stuart A. Boyer, “SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition”, ISA Publication.
4. Gruhn and Cheddie, “Safety Shutdown Systems” – ISA, 1998,

Reference Books:
1. Poppovik Bhatkar, “Distributed Computer Control for Industrial Automation”, Dekkar
Publication.
2. S.K.Singh, “Computer Aided Process Control”, Prentice Hall of India.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer Based Process Control”, Prentice Hall of India
4. N.E. Battikha, “The Management of Control System: Justification and Technical Auditing”, ISA.
5. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic controller”, Thomas Learning, edition,
2001.
6. John. W.Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers – Principles and Applications”,
3rd edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1995.
7. Bela G. Liptak “Instrument engineers handbook- Process control” Chilton book company- 3rd
edition.
8. D.J. Smith & K.G.L. Simpson, “Functional Safety: A Straightforward Guide to IEC61508 and
Related Standards”, -Butterworth-Heinemann Publications.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 20


Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Sub
Subject Name
code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
Advanced
ISE7051 Embedded 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Systems

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Advanced Embedded
ISE7051 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Systems

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Advanced Embedded systems


ISE7051 5

 To make students understand the 32bit processors and


higher architectures and configuration.
Course Objectives
 Use of Real Time systems and there design in
Instrumentation systems.
The students will be able to
 Designing using ARM processors
Course Outcomes  Use Real time software for designing instrumentation
systems
 Design with configurable hardware systems

Module Topics
Hrs.

ARM Processor
Introduction to ARM7 & ARM9 Architecture
1 ARM 7: ARM-THUMB mode, programming model, instruction set, 06
and programming.

LPC2148 architecture
Development tools for High level language-C,Device programming & ISP.
On-Chip Device peripherals
2 15
RTC programming
On-chip ADC programming for Signal Sampling
Watchdog timer

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 21


Timer programming- Timer / Capture mode
Serial port programming for PC communication
PWM Signal generation
Idle and Power down mode
Interrupt handling
Universal serial Bus
Interfacing peripherals
System Design
Instrumentation System design with ARM processor
3 (Instrumentation Hardware design to be at Block level only) 06
Eg: Data acquisition systems
PID Heater controller etc
FreeRTOS
4 FreeRTOS design,Task & Scheduler API’s,Queue API,Semaphore API 08
Software Timer API
Designing with FreeRTOS
5 08
LPC2148 port and design using FreeRTOS
Configurable Hardware
Introduction and Architecture of PAL, PLA, CPLD, FPGA.
Comparison of above devices & application areas. Advantages of
6 above. Introduction to development tools. Project development 05
cycle. Introduction of Hardware description Languages and its
Features.
Introduction to ASIC, PSOC.

List of Experiments:

2 application case studies, & Experiments mentioned in the Unit 2 & 4 above (Use of RTOS is
recommended wherever applicable).
A seminar presented by a group of about three students on latest state-of-the-art technologies
in Embedded systems: Processor families and trends, Embedded Devices like Digital
Camera, Cruise Controller, Mobile phone, Smartcard based Applications & Systems, Point of
Sale terminals, DVD Systems, CPLD, FPGA, VHDL, Verilog etc., Various RTOSs like
VxWorks, RTLinux, pSOS, Handheld OS- Symbian etc., Selection criteria & development
tools For various processors like Cortex-M3, ARM9.

Theory Examination:
 Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
 Total 4 question need to be solved.
 Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
 In question paper weight age of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 22


Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Reference Books:
 Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture Programming and Design, McGraw Hill,
Second Edition.
 Dr.K.V.K.K.Prasad, Embedded /Real Time Systems: Concept, Design and
Programming, DreamTech Press.
 John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices 4th Edition, Pearson Prentice
Hall.
 Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach by Lyla B.Das
 FreeRTOS manual
 LPC2148 Datasheet

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 23


Sub Code Subject Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Name Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
oral
ISE7052 Image 4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Processing

Sub Code Subject Examination Scheme


Name
Theory(Out of 100) Term Prac and Oral Total
Work Oral
Internal Assessment End
(out of 20) Sem
Test-I Test-I Avg Exam
ISE7052 Image 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Processing

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


ISE7052 Image Processing 5

 The principle of the syllabus is to give an introduction to basic concepts and


methodologies for digital image processing .The students are expected to
Course
develope a foundation that can be used as the basis for further study and
Objectives
research in this field.

 The syllabus gives great emphasis on basic principles as well as more


advanced techinques for image enhancement,segementation,
morophological operations etc

Course  Student will be able to understand the basic concepts and methodologies for
Outcomes digital image processing.

 Students will be able to study and program advanced techniques for image
enchancement ,segementation morophological operations etc.

Module Contents Hours

1 Introduction: Definition of image, generation of image, steps in image 8


processing, elements of digital image processing systems, image
enhancements, restoration and analysis.
Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of visible perception, image
model, sampling and quantization, relationships between pixels, imaging
geometry.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 24


2 Image Transforms: Introduction to D.F.T., 2-D.F.T., F.F.T., other 8
seperable image transforms (walsh, hadamard, discrete cosine, haar, slant,
KL)

3 Image Enhancements: Point operations, histogram modeling, spatial 17


filtering-smoothing, sharpening, low pass, high pass, homomorphic
filtering.

Image Restoration: Image observation models, inverse and wiener


filtering, F.I.R. wiener filters, filtering using image transforms, least
squares filters, generalized inverse, S.V.D. and interactive methods,
recursive filtering, causal models, digital processing of speckle images,
maximum entropy restoration.

4 Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, age linking and 5


boundary detection, thresholding, region oriented segmentation, use of
motion in segmentation.

5 Image Data Compression: Introduction, pixel coding, predictive 5


techniques (PCM, DPCM, etc), transform coding theory of images, hybrid
coding and vector DPCM.

6 Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries,erosion and 5


dilation,opening and closing,the Hit-or-Miss transformation,some
morphological algorithms Like thinning,thickening,skeletons

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
 Program for 2-D convolution.
 Image rotation scaling and translation.
 Program for 2-D correlation.
 Program for 2-D F.F.T.
 Program for Discrete cosine transform.
 Program for K L transform.
 Program for Histogram equalization & Histogram specification.
 Program for Mask operation (Spatial filtering).
 Program for edge detection.
 Program for Thresholding.
 Function for determining boundary descriptors, like boundary length and curvature.
 Program for opening and closing operations.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 25


to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
 R. C. Gonzalez, “Image Processing” Pearson Education 2nd edition, 1999.
 A. K. Jain, “Fundamental of Digital Image Processing”, PHI 2nd edition, 1995.
 W. K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley and Sons, 1994.

Reference Books:

 C. Phillips, “Image Processing in C”, BPB Publication, 1995.


 B. Chanda, D. Dutta Majumdar, “Digital Image processing”, PHI, 2000.
 Emmauel C. Ifeachor and Barry W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Pearson Education,
2nd edition, 2000.
 Don Pearson, “Image Processing” (The ESSEX series in Telecommunication and
information systems, McGraw Hill International ELTL engg. Series), 1991.
 Johnny Johnson, “Introduction to DSP”, PHI - 1996.
 Proakis, “DSP”, PHI 1997.
 Rabnier Gold, “Theory and Application of DSP”, PHI, 1996.
 Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, “Image Processing analysis and machine vision”,Thomson
Learning, 2nd edition, 1999

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 26


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract Tut. Total
ISE7053 Functional
4 - 2 4 --- 1 5
Safety

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
ISE7053 Functional safety 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Functional Safety 5
ISE7053
Course Objectives To make the students aware of basic concepts of safety instrumented
system, standards and risk analysis techniques.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Understand the role of Safety instrumented system in the industry.
 Identify and analyse the hazards,
 Select the Safety integrity level.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Introduction : 06
Safety Instrumented System (SIS) - need, features, components, difference
between basic process control system and SIS, Risk: how to measure risk,
risk tolerance, Safety integrety level,safety instrumented functions.
Standards and Regulation – HSE-PES, AIChE-CCPS, IEC-61508,
ANSI/ISA-84.00.01-2004 (IEC 61511 Mod ) & ANSI/ISA – 84.01-1996.9,
NFPA 85.10, API RP 556,11 , API RP 14C,11, OSHA (29 CFR 1910.119 –
Process Saftey Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals),

2 Safety life cycle: 06


Standards and safety life cycle, analysis phase, realisation phase, operations
phase Allocation of Safety Functions to Protection Layers, Develop Safety
Requirements Specifications, SIS Design and Engineering, Installation,
Commissioning and Validation, Operations and Maintenance, Modification,
De-commissioning.
3 Process Control – Active / Dynamic , Safety Control – Passive / 08
Dormant, Demand Mode vs. Continuous Mode, Separation of
Control and Safety Systems - HSE-PES, AIChE-CCPS, IEC-
61508, Common Cause and Systematic or Functional Failures,
Protection Layers : prevention and mitigation layers, SIS Technologies:
Pneumatic Systems, Relay Systems, Solid State Systems, Microprocessors /

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 27


PLC (Software based) Systems

4 Rules of Probability: 08
Assigning probability to an event, types of events and event combination,
combining event probabilities, fault tree analysis, failure rate and
probabiuity, simplifications and approximations.

5 Process Hazard Analysis: 12


Consequence analysis: Characterisation of potential events, dispersion,
impacts, occupancy considerations, consequence analysis tools.
Likelihood analysis: estimation and statistical analysis, fault propagation,
event tree analysis and fault tree analysis, Quantitative layer of protection
analysis: multiple initiating events, estimating initiating event frequencies
and IPL failure probabilities

6 Determining the Safety Integrity Level ( SIL ) : 08


Evaluating Risk, Safety Integrity Levels, SIL Determination Method : As
Low As Reasonably Practical ( ALARP ), Risk matrix, Risk Graph, Layers
Of Protection Analysis ( LOPA )

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum six assignments and two assignments with EXCEL.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 28


End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Reference Books:

 Paul Gruhn and H Jarry L. Cheddie,” Safety Instrumented systems: Design, Analysis and
Justification”, ISA , 2nd edition, 2006
 Dr. Eric W Scharpf, Heidi J Hartmann, Harlod W Thomas, “ Practical SIL target selection :
Risk analysis per the IEC 61511 safety Lifecycle”, exida,2012.
 Ed Marszal, Eric W Scharpf , “Safety Integrity Level Selection”, ISA.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 29


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract Tut. Total
ISE7054 Process
Modeling & 4 - 2 4 --- 1 5
Optimization

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Process Modeling &
ISE7054 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Optimization

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


ISE7054 Process Modeling & Optimization 05

Course Objectives  To make students understand the basic approach to the


problem of mathematical modeling and identifying the
variables by using direct methods.
 To translate a descriptive statement of the design
problem into a mathematical statement for optimization.
 To use numerical methods for solving engineering
optimization problems.

Course Outcomes Students will be able to


 formulate mathematical models of the complex
engineering systems.
 to use an optimization algorithm to solve linear and
nonlinear optimization problems.
 explain the kind of interaction possible with an
optimization algorithm.

Module No. Contents Hours


Mathematical Modeling
1. Definition of Mathematical model, Classifications of Models, How 07
to build a model, Use of mathematical models and principles of
formulation, Fundamental laws: Continuity equations, Energy
equation, Equations of motion, Chemical kinetics, Modeling of
CSTR (isothermal, no-isothermal, constant holdup, variable holdup).

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 30


2 Process Identification 06
Direct Methods: Time-Domain “Eyeball” Fitting of Step test data,
Direct Sine-Wave Testing, Pulse Testing, Step Testing, ATV
Identification, Least-Squares Method, State Estimator.
Introduction to Optimization: 06
3. Definition and meaning of optimization, need of optimization,
conventional versus optimum design process, optimization problem
formulation – statement of an optimization problem, terminology,
design vector, objective function, design constraints, constraint
surface,
Iteration, convergence, classification of optimization problem,
engineering applications of optimization.
Classical Optimization Techniques:
4. Fundamental concepts- local and global minima, local and global 10
maxima, quadratic form, necessary and sufficient condition of single
and multivariable optimization with no constraints, multivariable
optimization with equality and inequality constraints(Kuhn-Tucker
condition), Lagrange Theorem.
Linear Programming : 09
5. Definition of linear programming problem (LPP), standard form of
LPP, terminology, basic concepts, Simplex Algorithm and flowchart,
simplex method, two-phase simplex method, Duality in LPP

Numerical Methods for Unconstrained Optimum Design: 10


6. General algorithm for unconstrained minimization methods, rate of
convergence, unimodal and multimodal function ,reduction of a
single variable, one dimensional minimization methods- Equal
Interval method, Golden section search method, Polynomial
Interpolation : Quadratic Interpolation method, Cubic Interpolation
method,
Gradient of a function, properties of gradient vector, Steepest
Descent, Conjugate gradient (Fletcher-Reeves).

Assignments:
Each student shall do at least Two assignments on Module No. 1, One assignment on Module No.
2, Two Assignments on Module No. 3 and Two assignments on Module No. 4, 5 & 6 each.

Theory Examination:
 Question paper will consist of total 6 questions of 20 marks each.
 Only 4 questions need to be solved.
 Q.1 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus.
 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
 In question paper, weightage of each module will be proportional to the number of
respective lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire subject.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 31


Term work:
Term work consists of minimum ten assignments.
The distribution of the term work shall be as follows:

Laboratory work (Assignments/Experiments) :10 Marks


Laboratory work (Journal) :10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) :05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term-work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term-work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. S. S. Rao, “Optimization”, 2nd edition, New Age International (P) Ltd., Publishers, New
Delhi, 1995.
2. Jasbir S. Arora, “Introduction to Optimum Design”, ELSEVIER, Academic Press, USA –
2004.
3. T. E. Edger and D. M. Himmeblaue, “Optimization of Chemical Processes”, McGraw Hill
International Editions, 1989.
4. William L. Luyben, “Process Modeling, Simulation, And Control For Chemical Engineers”
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,1990.

Reference Books:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization For Engineering Design”, Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1998.
2. Ashok D. Belegundu, “Optimization concepts and applications in Engineering”, Pearson
Education, 2002.
3. Hamby A. Taha, “Operation Research”, Pearson education - 2007.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 32


Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Sub code Subject Name
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISE7055 Wireless
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Communication

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Internal Assessment Pract.
Sub code Subject Name End Term
(out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Wireless
ISE7055 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Communication

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISE7055 Wireless Communication 5


Course Objectives  To make students understand concept of Wireless
Communication in real time process control application.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Basics of Wireless Communication Systems
 Understands Wireless Transceivers and Advanced Transceivers
 Understands Wireless Application Protocol
 Understands Different Wireless trends in Industry

Module Topics Hrs.


1 Introduction to Wireless Communication:- 10
History, Types of services: Broadcast, paging, cellular Telephony, cordless
telephony, Wireless LAN (WLAN), Ad Hoc Network, Personal Area
Network (PAN), Wireless Sensors networks
Bandwith concept, Technical challenges of Wireless Communication:
Multipath propagation, spectrum limitations
Present scenario in Wireless Communication Systems
2 Wireless Transceivers: 08
Quadrature Phase shift keying, differential quadrature phase shift keying,
offset quadrature phase shift keying, minimum phase shift keying, Gaussian
minimum shift keying, power spectrum and error performance in fading
channels.
3 Advanced Transceivers: 06
Spread spectrum systems TDMA, SDMA, CDMA, FDMA principle, power
control, effects of multipath propagation on CDMA, OFDM, DSSS and
FHSS.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 33


4 Wireless Application Protocol (WAP): 08
Introduction, WAP and the World Wide Web (WWW), Introduction to
Wireless Application Protocol, The WAP Programming Model, WAP
Architecture, WAP Advantage and Disadvantages, Application of WAP,
imode, imode versus WAP
5 Application of Wireless Communication: 06
Bluetooth, Ultra Wide Band, Zigbee, WiFi, Introduction to 3G & 4G
6 WirelessHART: 10
WirelessIntroduction
WirelessHART Security Overview
WirelessHART Adaptor
WirelessHART Gateway
Co-Existence of WirelessHART with other Wireless Technologies
Control with WirelessHART
System redundancy with WirelessHART
Peer-to-Peer Communication with WirelessHART

Introduction to Wireless Foundation Fieldbus

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight Assignments based on above topics.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Assignments/Experiments) :10 Marks
Laboratory work (Journal) :10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) :05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 34


End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and Practice”, PEARSON,


4th impression, 2011
2. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, WILEY-INDIA, 2006
3. Vijay K. Garg, “Wireless Communications and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers,2009
4. http://www.hartcomm.org

Reference Books:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS,
2005
2. Davis Tse, Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, CAMBRIDGE
UNIVERSITY PRESS, 1st ed., 2005
3. Xiaodong Wang, H. Vincent Poor, “Wireless Communication Systems”, PEARSON, 1st ed.,
2004
4. Upena Dalal, “Wireless Communication”, OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS, 2nd impression,
2010
5. NIIT, “Basics of Wireless Communications”, Prentice-Hall of India,2004
6. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, PEARSON, 5th ed., 2004
7. T.L. Singal, Wireless Communications, Tata McGraw Hill ,2010

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 35


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC801 Digital control
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
system

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
ISC801 Digital control System 20 20 20 80 25 25 - 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

5
ISC801 Digital control System
Course Objectives  To equip the students with the basic knowledge of discretization.
 To study the stability analysis of digital control system.
 To study the canonical forms of digital control systems
 To determine steady state performance of Digital control systems.
 To design the controller and observer for digital control systems.
 To study PID discrete controller

Course Outcomes The students will be able to 


 Understand mathematical models of linear discrete-time control
systems using transfer functions and state-space models.
 Analyze transient and steady-state behaviours of linear discrete-
time control systems.
 Determine whether performance of linear discrete-time control
systems meet specified design criteria.
 Design controllers and observers for linear discrete-time control
systems so that their performance meet specified design criteria.
 Design PID controllers.

Topics Contents Hours

01 Introduction 12
Block diagram of Digital Control System, Advantages &limitations of Digital
Control System, comparison of continuous data & discrete data control
system, Examples of digital control system, data conversion and quantization,
sampling period considerations, sampling as impulse modulation, sampled
spectra &aliasing, Reconstruction of analog signals, zero order hold, first
order hold.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 36


principles of discretization- impulse invariance, finite difference
approximation of derivatives, rectangular rules for integration, Bilinear
transformation, Mapping between s-plane & z-plane.
02 Representation of digital control system 04
Linear difference equations, pulse transfer function, input output model,
examples of first order continuous and discrete time systems, Signal flow
graph applied to digital control systems.
03 Stability of digital control system in z-domain and Time domain analysis 06
Jury’s method, R.H. criteria, Comparison of time response of continuous data
and digital control system, steady state analysis of digital control system,
Effect of sampling period on transient response characteristics.
04 State space analysis 06
Discrete time state equations in standard canonical forms, similarity
transformation, state transition matrix, solution of discrete time state
equation, Discretization of continuous state space model &its solution.
05 Pole placement and observer designs 10
Concept of reachability, Controllability, Constructability & Observability,
Design of controller via Pole placement method, dead beat controller design,
concept of duality, state observer design, Concept of Multi rate output
feedback (MROF) based state estimation.
06 Transfer Function Approach to Controller Design 10
Control Structures, Internal Stability and Realizability, Internal Model
Principle and System Type, Well Behaved Signals, Solving Aryabhatta’s
Identity.
Proportional, Integral, Derivative Controllers-Discretization of PID
Controllers, Pole Placement Controller with Performance Specifications,
Implementation of Unstable Controllers.

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. To determine response of zero order hold and first order hold using Simulink of MATLAB
or any other suitable software.
2. Mapping from S- plane to Z-plane analytically and verification using MATLAB or any other
suitable software.
3. Discretization of continuous data system using i) Step invariance method, ii) Impulse
invariance method, and iii) Bilinear transformations, analytically and verification using
MATLAB or any other suitable software.
4. To represent given system in different canonical forms, analytically and verification using
MATLAB or any other suitable software.
5. To determine pulse transfer function of a given system analytically and its verification using
MATLAB or any other suitable software.
6. Determination of state transition matrix analytically and its verification using MATLAB or
any other suitable software.
7. To check controllability and obser vability of a given system analytically and verify the
result using MATLAB or any other software.
8. To plot pole-zero map of a discrete system and comment on response and stability.

9. To design the controller using .


i. Transform method

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 37


ii. Ackerman’s Formula

Analytically and verification using MATLAB or any other suitable software.


10. To design an observer using .
i. Transform Method
ii. Ackerman’s Method

Analytically and verification using MATLAB or any other suitable software.


11. To design deadbeat controller and observer using any method analytically and
verification using MATLAB or any other suitable software.

Note: The above list is only indicative of possible experiments. Faculty may choose other
experiments as well. Care should be taken that the entire syllabus is uniformly covered by
the experiments.

Note: Case study1: Developing a state space model of any physical system available in laboratory
(Flow loop, pressure loop, level loop etc.) and designing the controller using pole placement
method (state space method) and implement the same using simulink of MATLAB or any other
suitable software.

Case study2: Developing a pulse transfer function of any physical system available in laboratory
(Flow loop, pressure loop, level loop etc.) and designing the controller using transfer function
approach (eg. 2-DOF or IMC controller) and implement the same using simulink of MATLAB or
any other suitable software.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term work
Term work consists of minimum eight experiments, one case study. The distribution of the term
work shall be as follows,

Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks


Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 38


Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on problems.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. M. Gopal, "Digital Contol and State Variable Methods", Tata McGraw Hill, 2ndEdition,
March 2003.
2. K. Ogata, "Discrete Time Control Systems", Pearson Education Inc., 1995.
3. B.C. Kuo, "Digital Control Systems", Saunders College Publishing, 1992.
4. K.M. Moudgalya, “Digital Control”, Wiley-India, Indian Edition, 2009.
5. B. Bandopadhyay and S. Janardhanan, “Discrete Time Sliding Mode Control-A
Multirate Output Feedback Approach”, Springer,2005.

Reference Books:

1. Richard J. Vaccaro, "Digital Control", McGraw Hill Inc., 1995.


2. Ashish Tewari, "Modern Control System Design with MATLAB", John Wiley, Feb.
2002.
3. Joe H. Chow, Dean K. Frederick, "Discrete Time Control Problems using
4. MATLAB", Thomson Learning, 1st Edition, 2003.
5. Eronini Umez, "System Dynamics and Control", Thomson Learning, 1999.
6. Franklin Powel, "Digital Control of Dynamic Systems", Pearson Education, 3rd Edition,
2003.
7. Digital Control Systems vol. I & II - Isermann, Narosa publications
8. M. Fadali Antonio Visioli, “Digital control Engineering Analysis & Design”, Academic
press, 2nd edition, 2012.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 39


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
Instrumentation
ISC 802 Project
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Documentation
& Execution

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment
Subject Name End Term Practi
code (out of 20) Oral Total
sem Work cal
Test Test
Avg. Exam
1 2
Instrumentation
ISC 802 Project Documentation 20 20 20 80 25 ----- 25 150
& Execution

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


5
ISC 802 Instrumentation Project Documentation & Execution

Course Objectives  To provide knowledge of Instrumentation Project & Detailed


Engineering techniques in the EPC Consultancy.
 The course aims to explain Project Deliverables and Engineering
activities of Project Documentation.
Course Outcomes  Design & Develop Basic & Detailed Engineering Project
Deliverables.
 Understand Types of Project Executed in I & C Projects.
 Develop skills to Execute and carry different activities in process
industry.
 Understand Procedures, Guidelines and Thumb Rules for
performing Precommissioning activities.
 Overall Development of the students by Hands on working
Experience.

Module Topics Hrs.


1 The Project: Introduction, predictability, structure, flow and deliverables, 08
Project Planning and Scheduling – project scheduling estimating,
configuration management
2 The Project Team: Customer, designer and constructor 02
3 Standards used in instrumentation project: ISA, ANSI, & ASTM, 18
ASME, NFPA, NEMA.
Project Documents.- Need for Engineering Documents, General Guidelines
for Development of Documents, project stage, purpose, scope, contents,
references for document, team of creation and users.
Major Project Documents:
1) Process Flow Diagram-

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 40


2) Piping and Instrumentation diagrams (P&ID) - practical applications.
3) Instrument Index Sheet
4) Instrument specifications sheet- for temperature, pressure, level, flow
instruments and control valves.
5) Instrument Location Plan
6) Cable and Tray Routing
7) Cable Schedule
8) JB Schedule
9) Utility requirement
10) Air header schedule
11) Instrument Hook- up diagrams - for control valve, transmitters (DP in
liquid service, dry gas service,) Thermocouple, Temperature switch
line mounted, flow transmitter, typical level switch, typical
instrument air supply, connections for air supply and output. etc.
12) BOM for erection
13) Loop diagrams- pneumatic, electronic and digital data types.
14) Logic diagrams, SAMA Standard
4 Systems Integration: Division of labour, control logic specification, HMI 8
specification Development, System Architecture Design, Network single line
diagram generation, Other tasks like control system cabinet design, I/O
address assignment (Partitioning)-Hardware & software address, System
testing.
5 Procurement, Installation and Commissioning: 08
Procurement : Engineering Procurement procedure, PO format, preparation
of tender documents, bids, technical bid evaluation.
Inspection: Need for Inspection, Documents for Inspection,
General Inspection Guidelines, Factory acceptance test (FAT) &
Site acceptance test(SAT) , check lists.
Installation of instruments- Installation standards, installation of
instrument junction box, earthing system, cable laying (cable trays, cable
types, cable glands), tubing, instrument installation guidelines.
Commissioning: Pre-commissioning Procedures, check out procedure of
control valve, DP transmitter etc. calibration, testing of instruments,
operation and maintenance manual, commissioning Procedures. Onsite
training.
6 Advantages of using software packages for documentation. Overview of 4
documentation software packages used in industry like SPI -Intools.

Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments:

1. Study & Development of Equipment Layout Drawing.


2. Study & Development of Process Flow Diagrams.
3. Study & Development of Piping & Instrumentation Diagram.
4. Study & Development of Instrumentation Index.
5. Study ISA specification forms & Development of Instrument Specifications.
6. Study & Development of Instrumentation Location plan.
7. Study & Development of Cable Tray Layout.
8. Study & Development of Sample Hook up drawing & Preparation of BOM.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 41


9. Study & Development of Detailed Engineering schedules.( Project schedule / Cable
schedule / JB schedule / AH schedule )
10. Study & Development of Electronic Loop wiring Diagrams.
11. Study & Development of Control Panel wiring Diagrams.
12. Study & Perform pre-commissioning activities.( Hydro Test / Loop checking / Trouble
shooting etc)
13. Survey of Instrumentation softwares & Study different features of SPI INTools.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination: 25 Marks


Oral examination will be based on entire subject, Lab work & Consultants visit if any.

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of Laboratory work which includes Minimum study of eight assignments/
Creation of Documents
Other task:(Optional) Visit to any one Engineering consultants office /organizations to understand
their Working Environment & submission of Report.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Assignments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on problems.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 42


Text Books:
1. Andrew Williams,Applied instrumentation in the process industries, 2nd Edition, Vol. 2,
Gulf publishing company.
2. Michael D.whitt, Successful Instrumentation and Control Systems Design, ISA Publication.
3. Installation of Instrumentation & Process control systems- EEUA Handbook.

Useful References in PDF form:

Specification forms- ISA-20-1981- ISA Publication


Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Documentation Criteria- Process Industry Practices
Instrumentation Design Criteria-ONGC, Mumbai
Commissioning Procedures -ONGC, Mumbai

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 43


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISC803 Instrument and
4 - 2 4 - 1 5
System Design

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
code and Oral Total
(out of 20) sem Work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg Exam
Instrument and System
ISC803 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Design

Subject Code Subject Name Credits


ISC803 Instrument and System Design 5
Course Objectives To make students to understand
 Control Valve Sizing concepts and its usual terms for
applications like liquid, gas, vapour and flashing fluids.
 Control room and Control Panel details
 The process of Electronic product design
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Design and Analyse CV Sizing
 Identify various Control panels and Control Room details
 tDesign of Electronic product.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Design of Transducers: 05
An overview of static and dynamic performance characteristics of
instruments. Selection criteria for flow, temperature transducers. Design
considerations for transducers such as thermocouple, RTD, orifice plates,
Rota meter. Calibration and installation procedure for thermocouple and
RTD
2 Design of Control Valve: 16
Review of flow equations. Valve selection and sizing for liquid service, gas
or vapor service, flashing liquids, mixed phase flow. Control valve noise.
Control valve cavitations. Actuator sizing. Design of safety relief valves and
rupture discs.
3 Control Panel Design: 11
Panel selection-size, type, construction and IP classification. GA Diagrams,
Power wiring and distribution, Typical wiring diagrams for
AI,DI,AO,DO,RTD, and T/C modules. Earthing scheme. Panel ventilation,
cooling and illumination. Operating consoles- ergonomics. Wiring
accessories- ferules, lugs, PVC ducts, spiral etc. Wire sizes and color coding.
Packing, Pressurized panels- X, Y, and Z Purging for installation in
hazardous areas. Ex-proof panels.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 44


4 Electronic product design: 08
System Engineering, ergonomics, phases involved in electronic product
design.
Enclosure Design :
Packing and enclosures design guidelines, Grounding and shielding, front
panel and cabinet design of an electronic product.
5 Reliability engineering: 04
Reliability concepts, causes of failures, bath tub curve, Quality and
reliability, MTTF, MTBF, and MTTR. Availability and Maintainability.
Redundancy and redundant systems.
6 Control Room Design: Layout and environment. 04

List of Assignments:
1. Assignment on design of transducer
2. Assignment on valve sizing and examples on valve sizing for liquid services
3. Assignment: examples on valve sizing for gas and vapor services
4. Assignment: examples on valve sizing for flashing and mixed flow services
5. Assignment: examples on valve sizing for Noise and Cavitations
6. Assignment: examples on actuator sizing
7. Assignment on control panel design
8. Assignment on control room design, reliability and electronic product design
9. Assignment on electronic product design

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight assignments
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Assignments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 45


Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on problems.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. Bela G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineer’s Hand Book – Process Control”, Chilton
Company, 3rd Edition, 1995.
2. Andrew Williams, “Applied instrumentation in the process industries”, 2nd Edition, Vol.
1 & 3, Gulf publishing company.

Reference Books:
1. R. W. Zape, “Valve selection hand book third edition”, Jaico publishing house,
2. Les Driskell, “Control valve sizing”, ISA.
3. Curtis Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, PHI /Pearson
Education 2002.
4. Kim R Fowler, “Electronic Instrument Design”, Oxford University- 1996.
5. Manual on product design: IISc C.E.D.T.
6. Harshvardhan, “Measurement Principles and Practices”, Macmillan India Ltd-1993
7. Balaguruswamy E, “Reliability”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Pub.co. New Delhi, 1999.
8. Mourad Samiha & Zorian Yervant,” Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, New
York. John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
9. Lewis E E,” Introduction to Reliability Engineering (2nd)”, New York. John Wiley &
Sons, 1996.
10. Anand M S,” Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation Technology”, New Delhi.
Prentice Hall Of India, 2004.
11. Ott H W,” Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic System. ,” (2) John Wiley &
Sons New York, 1988.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 46


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISE8041 Nuclear
4 2 4 - 1 5
Instrumentation

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Internal
Subject
Subject Name Assessment (out End Exam Term
code Oral Total
of 20) sem duration Work
Test Test Avg Exam (in Hrs)
1 2 .
ISE8041 Nuclear
Instrumentation 20 20 20 80 03 25 25 150

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

Nuclear Instrumentation 5
ISE8041
Course Objectives  To introduce the basic concept of radioactivity, properties of
alpha,beta and gamma rays
 To study various radiation detectors, detector classification
 To study the electronics and counting systems
 To study applications of nuclear instrumentation in medicines,
Industry and in Agriculture.
Course Outcomes  The students get well versed with construction and working of
various radiation detectors.
 Students also get thorough knowledge of electronics and counting
systems used in nuclear instrumentaion
 Students get detailed information about applications of nuclear
instrumentation in medicine, industry etc.

Module Topics Hrs.

1 Radioactivity : General properties of Nucleus, Radioactivity, Nature of Nuclear 8


Radiation's, Properties of Alpha, Beta and Gamma rays, Natural and artificial radio-
activity. Radioactivity Laws, Half life period, radioactive series, Isotopes and
Isobars, Various effects- photoelectric, Compton scattering and pair production,
stopping power and range of charged nuclear particles.

2 Radiation Detectors : Techniques for radiation detection, Detectors for Alpha, beta 14
and gamma rays, Detector classification,Gas filled detectors - volt ampere
characteristics, Ionization chamber, Proportional counter, Geiger Muller counter,
Designing features, Scintillation detectors, Photomultiplier tube, dark currents,
pulse resolving power, efficiency of detection, Solid state detectors (Lithium ion

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 47


drifted – Si-Li, Ge-Li, Diffused junction, surface barrier detectors)

3 Electronics and Counting systems: Pre-amp, shaping amplifiers, Discriminators, 6


Scalars and count rate meters, Pulse shaping, peak stretchers, photon counting
system block diagram, single channel analyzer SCA (pulse height analyzer - PHA),
Coincidence detection

4 Nuclear Spectroscopy systems: Factors influencing resolution of gamma energy 6


spectrum, Energy resolution in radiation detectors, Multichannel analyzers (MCA),
Role of Nuclear ADC's – performance parameters.

5 Radiation Monitors &Application in Medicines : Radiation uptake studies – 8


block diagram and design features. Gamma camera – design, block diagram,
medical usage. Nuclear instrumentaion for health care, Radiation Personnel Health
Monitors like neutron monitors, Gamma Monitors, Tritium monitors, Iodine
monitors and PARA (paritculate acitivity radiation alarms).

6 Applications in Industry : Basic Nuclear Instrumentation system – block diagram, 6


Personal monitors like Thermo Luminescence Detectors (TLD). Dosimeters, Tele-
detectors. Nuclear Instrumentation for power reactor. Nuclear Insrumentation for
Toxic fluid tank level measurement, weighing, thickeness gauges, Agriculture
applications like food irradiation, Underground Piping Leak detection, water
content measurement etc.

List of Laboratory Experiments:


1. To study preamplifiers for nuclear pulse processing.
2. To study pulse shaping circuit for nuclear pulse processing
3. To study discriminators for nuclear pulse processing
4. Study of GM Counter Pulses
Purpose: The purpose of this experiment is to familiarize oneself with typical output pulses of a
GM counting system. The fact that the pulse height increases with increasing voltage through
different regions (ionization, proportionality etc) and is roughly constant in the Geiger region
including that pulse height is the same regardless of the energy or character of incident radiation

5. Study of the V-I characteristics of a GM Counting System.


Purpose: To study the variations of count rate with applied voltage and thereby determine
the plateau region, operting voltage and slope of plateau.
6. To study the Gamma Ray Spectrometer based on SCA.

Purpose: The purpose is to understand the functioning and working of Spectrometer.

7. To obtain the spectrum of Gamma emitting isotope Cs 137 by using scintillator


spectrometer.
8. To obtain the spectrum of Gamma emitting isotope Co 60 by using scintillator spectrometer.

9. To study the energy calibration of Spectrometer and analysis of the energy of unknown
Gamma source.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 48


Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:

Term work shall consist of minimum three experiments (from the list given above) and ten
assignments based on entire subject.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Assignments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 5 Marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. G.F. Knoll, “Radiation Detection & Measurement”, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1998.
2. P.W. Nicholson, “Nuclear Electronics”, John Wiley, 1998.
3. S.S. Kapoor & V.S. Ramamurthy, “Nuclear Radiation Detectors”, Wiley Easter Limited,
1986.

Reference Books:
1. Gaur & Gupta, “Engineering Physics”, Danpat Rai & Sons, 2001.
2. Irvin Kaplan, “Nuclear Physics”, Narosa, 1987.
 M.N. Avdhamule & P.G. Kshirsagar, “Engineering Physics”, S.Chand & Co., 2001.
 R.M. Singru, “Introduction to Experimental Nuclear Physics”, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd.,
1974.
 Hand Book of Nuclear Medical Instruments, Edited by B.R.Bairi, Balvinder Singh, N.C.
Rathod, P.V. Narurkar, TMH Publishing New Delhi, 1974.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 49


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISE8042 Power Plant
4 - 2 4 - 1 5
Instrumentation

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
code and Oral Total
(out of 20) sem Work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg Exam
Power Plant
ISE8042 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Instrumentation

Subject Subject Name Credits


Code

Power Plant Instrumentation 5


ISE8042
Course Objectives  To create awareness of energy resources and its scenario in India.
 To study the concept of power generation using various resources.
 To study the role of Instrumentation in power plants.
 To study and compare various power plants for optimal
performance.
Course Outcomes  The students get well versed with all power generation plants.
 Students also get thorough knowledge of Instrumentation involve
in power plants.

Module Contents Hours


1 Introduction: Energy sources, their availability, worldwide energy 04
production, energy scenario of India.
Introduction to Power generation, load curve, load factor.
Classification of energy generation resources.

2 Thermal Power Plant- Method of power generation, layout and 14


energy conversion process.
Types of Turbines & their control. Types of Boilers and their control.
Types of Generators and their control, Condensers. Types of Pumps
and Fans, variable speed pumps and Fans, Material handling system,
study of all loops-water, steam, fuel etc.
Schematics of Gas turbine and Diesel power plant. Application of
DCS in power plants.
3 Hydroelectric Power Plant- Site selection, Hydrology, Estimation 06
electric power to be developed, classification of Hydropower plants.
Types of Turbines for hydroelectric power plant, pumped storage
plants, storage reservoir plants.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 50


4 Nuclear Power Plant – Concept of energy generation from nuclear 08
fission, control of chain reaction.
Schematics of Nuclear power plant, types of reactors, reactor
control, safety measures.
5 Non-conventional Energy Resources – 12
Wind Energy: Power in wind, Conversion of wind power,
Aerodynamics of wind turbine, types of wind turbine and their
modes of operation, power control of wind turbines, Betz limit,
Pitch & Yaw control, wind mill, wind pumps, wind farms, different
generator protections, safety.
Solar Energy: Solar resource, solar energy conversion systems.
Solar PV technology: Block diagram of PV system, advantages and
limitations.
Solar thermal energy system: Principle, solar collector and its types,
solar concentrator and its types, safety.
Introduction to Modern Biomass, Bio-fuels, Geothermal energy,
Tidal energy and Ocean thermal energy.
6 Comparison of different types of power plant: thermal power plant, 04
hydro electric power plant, wind, solar, nuclear power plant on the
basis of: Performance, efficiency, site selection, Economics-capital
and running, safety.
Introduction to Hybrid Power Generation concept.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on industrial visit and entire subject.

Term Work:
Term work consists of minimum eight Tutorials/assignments based on entire subject and industrial
visit report.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Tutorials/Journal/Assignments) : 20 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 51


minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. “Power plant engineering”, P.K.Nag, 3rd edition, 2010. McGraw Hill.
2. “Power Plant Instrumentation”, K.Krishnaswamy, M. Ponni Bala, 2011, Prentice Hall India.
3. “A Textbook of Power Plant Engineering”, by R.K.Rajput, 2010, Laxmi Publications.

Reference Books:
1. “Power Plant Engg.”, Domkundwar
2. “Non-conventional energy resources”, by B. H. Khan, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. “Renewable energy Technology”, Chetan Singh Solanki, Prentice Hall Publication.
4. “Solar Energy”, by S. P. Sukhatme, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
5. “Nonconventional energy sources” G. D. Rai, Khanna Publication.
6. Solar Energy Technology vol I & II Dickinson & cheremision off.
7. Wind Energy Handbook, Tony Burton, David Sharpe, Nick Jenkins, Ervin Bossanyi (2001),
John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0471489972,
8. Wind Energy Explained: Theory, Design and Application
by James Manwell, J. F. Manwell, J. G. McGowan (2002), John Wiley and Sons Ltd, ISBN:
0471499722
9. Wind Turbine Operation in Electric Power Systems, Z. Lubosny (2003), Springer-Verlag
New York, Inc ; ISBN: 354040340X.
10. David Lindsey, “Power Plant control and instrumentation – control of boilers HRSG”,
Institution of Engineering and Technology.
11. “Boiler Control Systems Engineering”, by G.F. Gilman, 2005, ISA Publication.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 52


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISE8043 Optimal
4 - 2 4 - 1 5
Control Theory

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Elective-I : Optimal
ISE8043 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Control Theory

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISE8043 Elective-I : Optimal Control Theory 5


Course Objectives  To make students understand the optimal control problems their
types and how to solve them by calculus of variation and dynamic
programming approaches.
 To make student to understand the linear regulator and tracking
systems, discrete time optimal control systems.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Identify various optimal control problems with performance
measure with minimum time, minimum fuel, minimum energy,
terminal cost and general problems.
 Understand principle of calculus of variation, optimality, dynamic
programming and their applications.
 Make comparative study of problems based on calculus of
variation, linear regulator, tracking and dynamic programming
problems.
 Understand applications of these methods for solving various
optimal control problems.

Module Topics Hrs.


1 Introduction: Formulation of optimal control problem, Performance
measure, selecting a performance measure. 04
2 Calculus of variation I
Fundamental concepts: functional, Linearity of functional, closeness, 10
increment, variation, maxima and minima of functional, fundamental
theorem of calculus of variation.
Extremum of functional of single function: fixed and free end point
problems, Extremum of functional of several independent function: fixed
and free end point problems

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 53


3 Calculus of variation II
Constrained extremum of functions: elimination method, Lagrange 10
multiplier method
Constrained extremum of functionals: point constraint, differential equation
constraints, isoperimetric constraints
The Variational approach to optimal control problems: necessary conditions
for optimal control for different boundary conditions
4 Linear Regulator and Tacking Systems: 06
Linear Quadratic Regulator(LQR): Finite time LQR and infinite time LQR
Linear Quadratic Tracking Systems: Finite and infinite time Cases
5 Discrete time Optimal control systems: variational calculus for discrete 06
time systems, Discrete time LQR and tracking systems
6 Dynamic Programming: Principle of optimality, application of principle of 12
optimality to decision making, dynamic programming applied to routing
problem, Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman (HJB) equation, LQR system using HJB
equation

Assignments:

Each student shall do at least One assignment on Module No. 1, Two assignments on Module Nos.
2, 3, 4 and 5 each, Three Assignments on Module No. 6. For all assignments, use MATLAB or
Scilab or MathCAD simulation software.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 54


minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:
1. D. S. Naidu, Optimal Control System, CRC Press LLC - 2003,
2. D. E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory - An Introduction, Dover Publication, New York –
1998.

Reference Books:
1. B.D.O. Anderson and J.B. Moore. Optimal Control, Linear Quadratic Methods. Prentice-
Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1989.
2. H. Kwakernaak and R. Sivan. Linear Optimal Control Systems. Wiley-Interscience,
New York, 1972.
3. A. Sage. Optimum systems control. Prentice Hall, 2nd edition, 1977
4. F. L. Lewis and V. L. Syrmos. Optimal Control theory. Wiley Interscience, 2nd edition, 1995.
5. R. D. Robinett, D. G. Wilson, G. R. Eisler, and J. E. Hurtado. Applied dynamic programming
for optimization of dynamical systems. Advances in Design and Control. SIAM,
Philadelphia, 2005.
6. K. Ogata, Discrete Time Control System, Second Edition, PHI, Inc. 1995.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 55


Sub Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Subject Name
code Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
ISE8044 Nano
3 2 -- 3 -- 1 4
Technology

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Pract.
Subject Name Internal Assessment End Term
code and Oral Total
(out of 20) sem Work
oral
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
Nano
ISE8044 20 20 20 80 25 - 25 150
Technology

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISE8044 Nano Technology 5


Course Objectives  To explain students to basic concepts of nanodevices and various
sensors.
 To provide knowledge about the applications of nanotechnology
Course Outcomes The students will be able to
 Understand the working of MEMS and NEMS
 Understand the applications of nanosensors and detectors

Module Topics Hrs.

1 SEMICONDUCTOR NANODEVICES:- 10

Single Electron devices- Nano scale MOSFET – Resonant Tunneling


Transistor – Single Electron Transistors - Single Electron Dynamics -
Nanorobotics and Nanomanipulation - Mechanical Molecular Nanodevices -
Nanocomputers: Theoretical Models - Optical Fibers for Nanodevices -
Photochemical Molecular Devices – DNA Based Nanodevices – Gas based
Nanodevices - Micro and Nanomechanics.

Schottky devices - Quantum Structures and Devices - Quantum layers, wells,


dots and wires - Mesoscopic Devices - Carbon Nanotube based logic gates,
optical devices - Connection with quantum dots, quantum wires, and
quantum wells- Single Molecule electronic devices – photonic band gap
systems: applications and devices.
2 MEMS AND NEMS:- 20

Development of micro electronics - Region of Nanostructures - methods and


limits on microminiaturization in semiconductors- micro electro mechanical
system.
Silicon micromachining- semiconductors and insulator Microsystems
fabrication techniques - Silicon MEMS fabrication technology - Single
crystal reactive etching and metallization process.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 56


Non-silicon MEMS and fabrication techniques - SIC MEMS - Biomedical-
MEMS techniques - Integration of microsystems with electronics – RF
MEMS – Applications.
Polymers in Microsystems - Packaging of MEMS devices by anodic/fusion
bonding - Pressure sensors and packaging - MEMS performance and
evaluation.
Nano electro mechanical systems - fabrication and process techniques -
lntegration of nanosystems and devices - applications and future challenges.

3 NANOSENSORS, DETECTORS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS:- 08

SENSOR CHARACTERISTICS AND PHYSICAL EFFECTS: Active


and Passive sensors – Static characteristic - Accuracy, offset and linearity –
Dynamic characteristics - First and second order sensors – Physical effects
involved in signal transduction- Photoelectric effect – Photo dielectric effect
–Photoluminescence effect– Electroluminescence effect –
chemiluminescence effect – Doppler effect – Barkhausen effect – Hal effect
Ettinshausen effect – Thermoelectric effect – Peizoresistive effect –
Piezoelectric effect – Pyroelectric effect –Magneto-mechanical effect
(magnetostriction) – Magneto resistive effect.
4 Gas sensor materials: 06
Criteria for the choice of materials, Experimental aspects – materials,
properties, measurement of gas sensing property, sensitivity; Discussion of
sensors for various gases, Gas sensors based on semiconductor devices.
5 Biosensors: Principles- DNA based biosensors – Protein based biosensors – 04
materials for biosensor applications- fabrication of biosensors - future
potential.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Practical/Oral Examination:
Practical/Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments/assignments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 57


Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

REFERENCES:-
1. Charles P.Poole Jr and. Frank J.Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, Wiley
Interscience, 2003.
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”,
Imperial College Press, 2004.
3. C.M. Niemeyer and C.A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology, Concepts, Applications and
perspectives”, WILEY-VCH, 2004.
4. G.M.Chow and K.E.Gonsalves, “Nanotechnology - Molecularly Designed Materials”,
American chemical society Symposium series 622, 1996.
5. K.P.Jain, “Physics of semiconductor Nanostructures”, Narosa Publishers, 1997.
6. W.R.Fahrner, “Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics: Materials, Devices, Measurement
Techniques”, Springer, 2005.
7. K.Goser, P.Glosekotter & J.Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronic and Nanosystems – From
Transistors to Molecular Quantum Devices” Springer, 2004.
8. S. E. Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices and Structures”, CRC Press,
2002.
9. Gregory Timp, “Nanotechnology”, Springer, 1999.
10. Vijay K Varadan, K J Vinoy, S Gopalakrishnan, “Smart Material Systems and MEMS:
Design and Development”, John Wiley &Sons, 2006.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 58


Teaching Scheme (Hrs) Credits Assigned
Sub
Subject Name Theor
code Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
y
ISE8045 Fiber Optic
4 2 - 4 1 - 5
Instrumentation

Examination Scheme
Theory(out of 100)
Sub Internal Assessment Pract.
Subject Name End Term
code (out of 20) and Oral Total
sem Work
Test oral
Test 1 Avg. Exam
2
Fiber Optic
ISE8045 20 20 20 80 25 -- 25 150
Instrumentation

Subject Code Subject Name Credits

ISE8045 Fiber Optic Instrumentation 5


Course Objectives  To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and
their properties.
 To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications
of optical fibres.
Course Outcomes The students will be able to:
 Identify various sensors, Fiber optic and its specifications.
 Understand principle of working of Fiber Optic used to measure
Temperature, Displacement, Level, and various miscellaneous
other sensors
 Understand applications of Fiber Optics in industry.

Module Topics
Hours
Optical Fiber and Their properties:
1 Ray theory, wave guiding principles, Theory of optical wave propagation,
Types and classification of optical fibers, optical fiber mode, single mode
fiber, special fiber, fiber materials, fiber fabrication, transmission 08
characteristics of fiber, absorption losses, scattering losses, dispersion,
polarisation, non-linear phenomena
Optical Sources and Detectors, Power Launching and Coupling:
2 Laser theory, Laser diodes, LED, PN diode, Pin diode, avalanche diode,
solid, liquid, gas and semiconductor laser their characteristics
modulation circuits, optical detection principles, quantum efficiency and 12
detector noise, Source to fiber power launching, fiber alignment and
fiber to fiber joints, splices, connectors, coupling losses, lensing schemes
for coupling improvement, LED coupling to single mode fiber.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 59


Optical Fiber Measurements:
3 Measurement of attenuation, dispersion, refractive index profile of fiber and
cut off wavelength, numerical aperture, OTDR, Measurement of flow, 06
pressure, Temperature, displacement, acceleration and fluid level vibration
measurement.
Fiber Optic Sensing Principles and Techniques:
4 Classification and principle of fiber optic sensors, fiber grating and fiber 06
Bragg grating technology and distributed optical fiber sensing.

Optical Amplification and Integrated Optics:


5 Beam splitter, directional coupler, opto isolators, multi mode interference
coupler(MMIC) optical modulators, fiber modulator optical amplifiers, 08
optical switches, frequency translators, optoelectronic integration.

Holography and Laser instruments in medical application and Remote


6 Sensing:

Basic principle, methods, Holographic interferometry. Application of laser 08


in medical application, laser in industrial application.
Components of Remote sensing, Active and passive Remote Sensing-
platforms, Electro-magnetic radiation(EMR),EMR spectrum

List of Experiments:

1. Study of Fiber optic communication set-up.


2. To measure numerical aperture of an optical fiber.
3. To study characteristic curves of optical sources and detectors.
4. To plot spectral response characteristics of photodiode
5. Displacement measurement by fiber optic sensor.
6. Characteristics of opto- coupler
7. To study attenuation losses in optical fiber.
8. To study dispersion losses in optical fiber.
9. To study different splicing techniques.
10. Design of an optical fiber sensor.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.


2. Total 4 question need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 60


Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments) : 10 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal) : 10 Marks
Attendance (Theory and Practical) : 05 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.
End Semester Examination: Some guidelines for setting the question papers are as, six questions to
be set each of 20 marks, out of these any four questions to be attempted by students. Minimum 80%
syllabus should be covered in question papers of end semester examination.

Text Books:

1. “Fiber optics – communication”, Gerd Keiser.


2. “Integrated circuits and semiconductor devices theory and application” Deboo Burrous,
McGraw Hill Second Edition.

Recommended Books:

1. “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, J.Wilson J.F.B.Hawkes, Prentice Hall of India New


Delhi. 1996.
2. “Optical fiber communications principles and practice”, J.M. senior Prentice Hall of India ,
Second Edition 1996
3. “Fiber optics - communication and other application”, H. Zanger and Zanger McGraw Pub
4. “Optical fiber systems, Tecnology, Design & Application”, Kao C.K.,McGraw Hill.
5. “Introduction to optical fibers”, Cherin, McGraw Hill.
6. “Text book on optical fiber Communication & it’s application” S.C.Gupta (PHI)
7. “Basics of Remote Sensing & GIS”, By: Dr. S. Kumar ( Laxmi publications )

University of Mumbai, Instrumentation Engineering, Rev 2012-13 61

You might also like